HP StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 Storage Area Network Switch Service manual

hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 service manual

Part Number: A7284-96002/AA-RS2JA-TE

First Edition (August 2002)

This manual describes the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 and attached hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application. For service representatives, it describes diagnostic procedures, repair procedures, and the removal and replacement procedures for field-replaceable units (FRUs). An illustrated parts breakdown is included for all FRUs.

© Hewlett-Packard Company, 2002. All rights reserved.

Hewlett-Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

This document contains proprietary information, which is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.

Hewlett-Packard Company shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Hewlett-Packard Company products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

Printed in the U.S.A.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

First Edition (August 2002)

Part Number: A7284-96002/AA-RS2JA-TE

Contents

About this Guide

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Symbols in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Symbols on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Rack Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

HP Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

HP Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

HP Authorized Reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

General Information

I

Switch Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Switch Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

Zoning Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Multi-Switch Fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

HAFM Server Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

HAFM Server Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

Ethernet Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Embedded Web Server Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Maintenance Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Remote Workstation Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14

Minimum Remote Console Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16

Field Replaceable Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

SFP Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

edge switch 2/16 installation guide iii

Contents

Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

Connectors and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

Initial Machine Load Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

Ethernet LAN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

Power and System Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

FRU Status LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

Maintenance Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

Software Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

HAFM Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22

HAFM Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23

Hardware View Layout and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

Product Manager Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26

LED Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27

Product Manager Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27

View Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

View Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35

Topology Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37

Zone Set Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

HAFM Services Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

Event Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39

Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40

Embedded Web Server Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41

SNMP Trap Message Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42

E-Mail and Call-Home Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43

Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43

Tools Supplied with the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43

Tools Supplied by Service Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44

Diagnostics

Maintenance Analysis Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

MAP 0000: Start MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26

iv edge switch 2/16 installation guide

Contents

MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32

MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33

MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39

MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58

MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63

MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port Problem Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . 2–79

MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–90

Repair Information

Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Using Log Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

HAFM Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

HAFM Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

Session Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4

Product Status Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Fabric Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Audit Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

Refresh the Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7

Clear the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7

Hardware Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7

Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

Refresh the Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10

Clear the Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10

Threshold Alert Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10

Using Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12

Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12

FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17

Zone Set View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17

Performing Port Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19

Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19

Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20

Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24

Perform Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26

Internal Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26

edge switch 2/16 installation guide v

Contents

External Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28

Perform Channel Wrap Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29

Swapping Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30

Collecting Maintenance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31

Clean Fiber-Optic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33

Power-On Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34

Power-Off Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

Reset or IPL the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

Reset the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36

IPL the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36

Set the Switch Online or Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37

Set Online State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37

Set Offline State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38

Block and Unblock Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39

Block a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39

Unblock a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39

Manage Firmware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40

Determine a Switch Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40

Add a Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41

Modify a Firmware Version Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44

Delete a Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45

Download a Firmware Version to a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45

Manage Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48

Back Up the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48

Restore the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49

Reset Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50

Install or Upgrade Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51

FRU Removal and Replacement

Remove and Replace FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2

RRP: SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2

Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

RRP: Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

vi edge switch 2/16 installation guide

Contents

RRP: Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7

RRP: CTP Card - Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8

Replacing a Failed Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Front-Accessible FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Rear-Accessible FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2

Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3

Messages

HAFM Application Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Edge-16 Switch Product Manager Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–18

Event Codes

System Events (000 through 199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–3

Power Supply Events (200 through 299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–11

Fan Module Events (300 through 399) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–15

CTP2 Card Events (400 through 499) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–21

Port Events (500 through 599) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–29

SBAR Events (600 through 699) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–34

Thermal Events (800 through 899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–35

Glossary

Index

Figures

1–1 Switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

1–2 Out-of-Band Product Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

1–3 Inband Product Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

1–4 HAFM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

1–5 12-Port Ethernet Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

1–6 Typical Network Configuration (One Ethernet Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

1–7 Typical Network Configuration (Two Ethernet Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16

1–8 Edge Switch 2/16 (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

1–9 Edge Switch 2/16 (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

edge switch 2/16 installation guide vii

1–10 Product View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23

1–11 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

1–12 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

1–13 Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31

1–14 FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32

1–15 Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33

1–16 Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34

1–17 Fabrics View - Topology Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37

1–18 Fabrics View - Zone Sets Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

1–19 HAFM Services Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39

1–20 Multi-mode and Single-mode Loopback Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43

1–21 Fiber-Optic Protective Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44

1–22 Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44

3–1 HAFM Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4

3–2 Product Status Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

3–3 Switch Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

3–4 Hardware Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8

3–5 Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

3–6 Threshold Alert Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11

3–7 Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13

3–8 FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15

3–9 Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

3–10 Zone Sets View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18

3–11 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20

3–12 Port Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21

3–13 Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24

3–14 Port Diagnostics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27

3–15 Channel Wrap On for Port n Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30

3–16 Swap Ports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31

3–17 Save Data Collection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32

3–18 Data Collection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33

3–19 Clean Fiber-Optic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34

5–1 Front-Accessible FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5–2 Rear-Accessible FRUs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3

Contents

Tables

1–1 Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

1–2 Operating Status - Status Bar and Switch Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36

1–3 HAFM Services Status Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40

2–1 Factory-Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2–2 MAP Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

2–3 Event Codes versus Maintenance Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

3–1 Factory-Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

4–1 ESD Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

5–1 Front-Accessible FRU Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2

5–2 Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3

5–3 Miscellaneous Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3

edge switch 2/16 installation guide ix

About this Guide

This manual describes the service procedures for the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16.

Intended Audience

This publication is intended for service personnel, and any individuals who monitor, configure, and repair the edge switch 2/16.

Related Documentation

In addition to this guide, HP provides corresponding information:

• hp StorageWorks product in a SAN environment - planning guide for director

2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32, A6534-96025/AA-RS2DA-TE

• hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32, A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE

• hp StorageWorks CLI reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32, A6534-96027/AA-RQ7AB-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 installation guide,

A7283-96001/AA-RSTZA-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 service manual, A7283-96002/AA-RS2GA-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 product manager user guide,

A7283-96003/AA-RS2HA-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 release notes, A7283-96004/AV-RSU0A-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 flexport upgrade instructions,

A7290-96001/AA-RS33A-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 installation guide,

A7284-96001/AA-RSU2A-TE

edge switch 2/16 service manual

xiii

About this Guide

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager user guide,

A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 release notes, A7284-96004/AV-RSU3A-TE

• hp StorageWorks edge switch rack mount installation instructions,

A7283-96004/AA-RT4MA-TE

• hp StorageWorks HAFM server installation guide, A6582-96001/AA-RT4KA-TE

• hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide, A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE

• hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager release notes, A6575-96004/AV-RQZJC-TE

• hp StorageWorks SFP transceiver installation instructions,

A6534-96030/AA-RSS3A-TE

Document Conventions

The conventions included in

Table 1

apply.

Table 1: Document Conventions

Element

Cross-reference links

Key names, menu items, buttons, and dialog box titles

File names, application names, and text emphasis

User input, command names, system responses (output and messages)

Convention

Blue text: Figure 1

Bold

Italics

Variables

Website addresses

Monospace font

COMMAND NAMES are uppercase unless they are case sensitive

Monospace, italic font

Sans serif font ( http://thenew.hp.com

) xiv

edge switch 2/16 service manual

About this Guide

Symbols in Text

These symbols may be found in the text of this manual. They have the following meanings.

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions in the warning could result in bodily harm or loss of life.

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.

IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information or specific instructions.

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of information.

Symbols on Equipment

Any enclosed surface or area of the equipment marked with these symbols indicates the presence of electrical shock hazards. Enclosed area contains no operator serviceable parts.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock hazards, do not open this enclosure.

Any RJ-45 receptacle marked with these symbols indicates a network interface connection.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug telephone or telecommunications connectors into this receptacle.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

xv

About this Guide

Any surface or area of the equipment marked with these symbols indicates the presence of a hot surface or hot component. Contact with this surface could result in injury.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Power supplies or systems marked with these symbols indicate the presence of multiple sources of power.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock, remove all power cords to completely disconnect power from the power supplies and systems.

Any product or assembly marked with these symbols indicates that the component exceeds the recommended weight for one individual to handle safely.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, observe local occupational health and safety requirements and guidelines for manually handling material.

Rack Stability

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, be sure that:

• The leveling jacks are extended to the floor.

• The full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.

• In single rack installations, the stabilizing feet are attached to the rack.

• In multiple rack installations, the racks are coupled.

• Only one rack component is extended at any time. A rack may become unstable if more than one rack component is extended for any reason.

xvi

edge switch 2/16 service manual

About this Guide

Getting Help

If you still have a question after reading this manual, contact an HP authorized service provider or access our website: http://thenew.hp.com.

HP Technical Support

In North America, call technical support at 1-800-652-6672, available 24 hours a day,

7 days a week.

NOTE: For continuous quality improvement, calls may be recorded or monitored.

Outside North America, call technical support at the nearest location. Telephone numbers for worldwide technical support are listed on the HP website under support: http://thenew.hp.com/country/us/eng/support.html

.

Be sure to have the following information available before calling:

• Technical support registration number (if applicable)

• Product serial numbers

• Product model names and numbers

• Applicable error messages

• Operating system type and revision level

• Detailed, specific questions

HP Website

The HP website has the latest information on this product, as well as the latest drivers.

Access storage at: http://thenew.hp.com/country/us/eng/prodserv/storage.html. From this website, select the appropriate product or solution.

HP Authorized Reseller

For the name of your nearest HP Authorized Reseller:

• In the United States, call 1-800-345-1518

• In Canada, call 1-800-263-5868

• Elsewhere, see the HP website for locations and telephone numbers: http://thenew.hp.com.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

xvii

1

General Information

I

The hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 provides dynamic switched connections between Fibre Channel servers and devices in a storage area network (SAN) environment. SANs introduce the concept of server-to-device networking and multi-switch fabrics, eliminate requirements for dedicated connections, and enable the enterprise to become data centric.

A SAN provides speed, high capacity, and flexibility for the enterprise, and is primarily based upon Fibre Channel architecture. The switch implements Fibre

Channel technology that provides a bandwidth of 2.125 gigabits per second, redundant switched data paths, a scalable number of active ports, and long transmission distances (up to 35 kilometers).

This chapter describes the switch and attached hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager

(HAFM) server. The chapter specifically discusses:

• Switch management, error-detection and reporting features, serviceability features, zoning, multi-switch fabrics, and specifications.

• The HAFM server and minimum hardware specifications.

• Remote workstation configurations and hardware specifications.

• Maintenance approach.

• Field-replaceable units (FRUs).

• Connectors and indicators.

• Software diagnostic features.

• Tools and test equipment.

Switch Description

The switch can be installed on a table or desk top, or mounted in an equipment cabinet or in any standard equipment rack.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–1

General InformationI

Multiple switches and the HAFM server communicate on a local area network (LAN) through one or more 10/100Base-T Ethernet hubs. One or more 12-port Ethernet hubs are optional and can be ordered with the switch. Up to three hubs are daisy-chained as required to provide additional Ethernet connections as more switches (or other

Hewlett Packard managed products) are installed on a customer network.

Figure 1–1 illustrates the switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet hub.

HAFM Server

HP Hub

Power

Fault

ProCurve 10/100 Hub12

HP J3294A

Reset

Act Col MDI-X

(out)

Port 1 Only

MDI

(in)

2X 3X

4X 5X 6X

7X 8X 9X 10X

11X 12X

RST

10/100

StorageWorks d irector 2/64

PWR

ERR Switch

1–2

Figure 1–1: Switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet Hub

The switch provides dynamic switched connections for servers and devices, supports mainframe and open-systems interconnection (OSI) computing environments, and provides data transmission and flow control between device node ports (N_Ports) as dictated by the Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling Interface (FC-PH 4.3). Through interswitch links (ISLs), the switch can connect additional switches to form a Fibre

Channel multi-switch fabric.

The switch provides connectivity for devices manufactured by multiple original equipment manufacturers (OEMs). To determine if an OEM product can communicate through connections provided by the switch, or if communication restrictions apply, refer to the supporting publications for the product or contact your Hewlett Packard marketing representative

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Switch Management

Out-of-band (non-Fibre Channel) management access to HP products is provided through an Ethernet LAN connection to a switch front panel. The following out-of-band management access methods are provided:

• Management through the HAFM application. The HAFM application includes the edge switch 2/16 Product Manager application. This GUI resides on the HAFM server and provides a single point of management for all directors and switches.

Operators at remote workstations can connect to the HAFM server through the local HAFM application and associated Product Manager applications to manage and monitor switches controlled by the HAFM server. A maximum of nine concurrent users (including a local user) can log in to the HAFM application.

• Management using simple network management protocol (SNMP). An SNMP agent is implemented through the HAFM application that allows administrators on SNMP management workstations to access product management information using any standard network management tool. Administrators can assign Internet

Protocol (IP) addresses and corresponding community names for up to six SNMP workstations functioning as SNMP trap message recipients.

• Management through the Internet using the EWS interface installed on the switch.

This interface supports configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic operation of the product, but does not offer all the capabilities of the corresponding Product

Manager application. Administrators launch the web server interface from a remote PC by entering the product’s IP address as the Internet uniform resource locator (URL), then entering a user name and password at a login screen. The PC browser then becomes a management console.

• Management through a customer-supplied remote workstation communicating with the HAFM server through a corporate intranet.

• Management through the command line interface (CLI). The CLI allows you to access many HAFM and Product Manager applications while entering commands during a telnet session with the switch. The primary purpose of the CLI is to automate management of a large number of switches using scripts. The CLI is not an interactive interface; no checking is done for pre-existing conditions and no prompts display to guide users through tasks. Refer to the hp StorageWorks CLI reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32

(A6534-96027/AA-RQ7AB-TE).

Figure 1–2 illustrates an example of out-of-band product management. In the figure,

the managed product is an edge switch 2/16.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–3

General InformationI

1–4

2

10/100 Mbps

Corporate LAN

1

3

Power

Fault

Reset

10

11 12

Link

100

Link

100

Act Col

Port 1 Only

MDI-X

(out)

MDI

(in)

2X

3X 4X 5X

6X

7X 8X

9X 10X 11X

12X

4

Internet

Connection

StorageWorks director 2/64

RST

10/100

PWR

ERR 6

5

SHR-2314d

1 SNMP management workstation

2 Remote user workstation

3 HP Ethernet hub

4 HAFM server

5 Web browser

6 Edge switch 2/16

Figure 1–2: Out-of-Band Product Management

The following inband management access methods are provided as options:

• Management through the product’s open-system management server (OSMS) that communicates with an application client. The application resides on an open-systems interconnection (OSI) device attached to a switch port, and communicates using Fibre Channel common transport (FC-CT) protocol. Product operation, port connectivity, zoning, and fabric control are managed through a device-attached console.

• Management through the product’s Fibre Connection (FICON) management server (FMS) that communicates with the IBM System Automation for OS/390

(SA OS/390) operating system. The operating system resides on an IBM

System/390 or zSeries 900 Parallel Enterprise Server attached to a director or switch port, and communicates through a FICON channel. Control of connectivity and statistical product monitoring are provided through a host-attached console.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Figure 1–3 on page 1-5 illustrates inband product management. In the figure, the

managed product is an edge switch 2/16. The figure shows the following elements:

1

4 FICON

Channel

2

Fibre Channel

Connection 11

PWR

ERR

3

SHR-2364b

1 S/390 or zSeries 900 parallel

Enterprise Server

2 Host-attached console

3 Edge switch 2/16

4 OSI server

Figure 1–3: Inband Product Management

Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features

The switch provides the following error-detection, reporting, and serviceability features:

• Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on switch FRUs and adjacent to Fibre Channel ports that provide visual indicators of hardware status or malfunctions.

• System and threshold alerts, event logs, audit logs, link incident logs, threshold alert logs, and hardware logs that display switch, Ethernet link, and Fibre Channel link status at the HAFM server or on a remote workstation.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–5

General InformationI

• Diagnostic software that performs power-on self-tests (POSTs) and port diagnostics (internal loopback, external loopback, and Fibre Channel (FC) wrap tests). The FC wrap test applies only when the switch is configured to operate in

S/390 mode.

• Automatic notification of significant system events (to support personnel or administrators) through e-mail messages or the call-home feature.

• An internal modem in the HAFM server for HP call-home support

NOTE: For directors and switches installed in some legacy environments, call-home notification requires installation of HP Proactive Service software. This service is offered at no additional charge for subsystems covered under an on-site warranty or on-site storage hardware support contract. To register or order Proactive Service software, contact your HP customer service representative.

• An RS-232 maintenance port at the rear of the switch (port access is password protected) that enables installation or service personnel to change the switch’s internet protocol (IP) address, subnet mask, and gateway address; or to run diagnostics and isolate system problems through a local or remote terminal.

• Redundant FRUs; (small form factor pluggable (SFP)) optical transceivers, power supplies, and cooling fans that are removed or replaced without disrupting switch or Fibre Channel link operation.

• A modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of FRUs without tools or equipment.

• Concurrent port maintenance. SFPs and Fiber-optic cables are removed and attached to ports without interrupting other ports or switch operation.

• Beaconing to assist service personnel in locating a specific port or switch. When port beaconing is enabled, the amber LED associated with the port flashes. When unit beaconing is enabled, the system error indicator on the front panel flashes.

Beaconing does not affect port or switch operation.

• Data collection through the product manager application to help isolate system problems. The data includes a memory dump file and audit, hardware, and engineering logs.

• Status monitoring of redundant FRUs and alternate Fibre Channel data paths to ensure continued switch availability in case of failover. The HAFM application queries the status of each backup FRU daily. A backup FRU failure is indicated by an illuminated amber LED.

1–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Simple network management protocol (SNMP) management using the Fibre

Alliance MIB that runs on the HAFM server. Up to 12 authorized management workstations can be configured through the HAFM application to receive unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages indicate operational state changes and failure conditions.

• SNMP management using the Fibre Channel Fabric Element MIB, transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) MIB-II definition (RFC 1213), and a product-specific MIB, all of which run on each switch. Up to 12 authorized management workstations can be configured through the product manager application to receive unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages indicate switch operational state changes and failure conditions.

NOTE: For more information about SNMP support provided by Hewlett Packard products, refer to the hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge

switch 2/32 (A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE).

Zoning Feature

The switch supports a name server zoning feature that partitions attached devices into restricted-access groups called zones. Devices in the same zone can recognize and communicate with each other through switched port-to-port connections. Devices in separate zones cannot communicate with each other.

Zoning is configured by authorizing or restricting access to name server information associated with device N_Ports that attach to switch fabric ports (F_Ports). A zone member is specified by the port number to which a device is attached, or by the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the host bus adapter (HBA) or Fibre Channel interface installed in a device. A device can belong to multiple zones.

CAUTION: If zoning is implemented by port number, a change to the switch fiber-optic cable configuration disrupts zone operation and may incorrectly include or exclude a device from a zone.

If zoning is implemented by WWN, removal and replacement of a device HBA or Fibre

Channel interface (thereby changing the device WWN) disrupts zone operation and may incorrectly include or exclude a device from a zone.

In Open Fabric mode, only zoning by WWN is supported. Zoning by port numbers is not.

Zones are grouped into zone sets. A zone set is a group of zones that is enabled

(activated) or disabled across all switches in a multi-switch fabric. Only one zone set per fabric can be enabled at one time.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–7

General InformationI

Multi-Switch Fabrics

A Fibre Channel topology that consists of one or more interconnected switches or switch elements is called a fabric. Operational software provides the ability to interconnect switches (through expansion port (E_Port) connections) to form a multi-switch fabric. The data transmission path through the fabric is typically determined by fabric elements and is user-transparent. Subject to zoning restrictions, devices attached to any interconnected switch can communicate with each other through the fabric.

Because a multi-switch fabric is typically complex, maintenance personnel should be aware that several factors can degrade fabric performance or cause connectivity failures. These factors include:

• Domain ID assignment - Each switch in a fabric is identified by a unique domain

ID that ranges from 1 through 31. A domain ID of 0 is invalid. If two operational fabrics join, they determine if any domain ID conflicts exist between the fabrics.

If one or more conflicts exist, the E_Ports that form the interswitch link (ISL) segment to prevent the fabrics from joining.

• Zoning - In a multi-switch fabric, zoning is configured on a fabric-wide basis, and any change to the zoning configuration is applied to all switches in the fabric. To ensure zoning is consistent across a fabric, the following rules are enforced when two fabrics (zoned or unzoned) join:

— Fabric A unzoned and Fabric B unzoned - The fabrics join successfully, and the resulting fabric remains unzoned.

— Fabric A zoned and Fabric B unzoned - The fabrics join successfully, and fabric B automatically inherits the zoning configuration from fabric A.

— Fabric A unzoned and Fabric B zoned - The fabrics join successfully, and fabric A automatically inherits the zoning configuration from fabric B.

— Fabric A zoned and Fabric B zoned - The fabrics join successfully only if the zone configurations can be merged. If the fabrics cannot join, the connecting ports segment and the fabrics remain independent.

Zone configurations for two fabrics are compatible (the zones can join) if the active zone set name is identical for each fabric, and if zones with the same name have identical elements.

• Port segmentation - When an ISL activates, the switches exchange operating parameters to determine if they are compatible and can join to form a single fabric. If incompatible, the connecting E_Port at each switch segments to prevent

1–8

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI the creation of a single fabric. A segmented link transmits only Class F traffic; the link does not transmit Class 2 or Class 3 traffic. The following conditions cause ports to segment:

— Incompatible operating parameters - either the resource allocation time-out value (R_A_TOV) or error-detect time-out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between switches. To prevent port segmentation, the same E_D_TOV and

R_A_TOV must be specified for each switch.

— Duplicate domain IDs - one or more domain ID conflicts are detected.

— Incompatible zoning configurations - zoning configurations for the switches are not compatible.

— Build fabric protocol error - a protocol error is detected during the process of forming the fabric.

— No principal switch - no switch in the fabric is capable of becoming the principal switch.

NOTE: At least one director or switch in a multi-switch fabric must be set to either principal or default, making it capable of becoming principal switch. If all directors and switches are set to never principal, all ISLs will segment (Reason code 05).

— Unresponsive switch - Each switch in a fabric periodically verifies operation of all attached switches. An ISL segments if the attached switch does not respond to a verification request.

— ELP retransmission failure timeout-a switch that exhibits a hardware failure or connectivity problem cannot transmit or receive Class F frames. The switch did not receive a response to multiple exchange link protocol (ELP) frames, did not receive a fabric login (FLOGI) frame, and cannot join an operational fabric.

Switch Specifications

This section lists the physical characteristics, storage and shipping environment, operating environment, and service clearances for the switch.

Physical Characteristics

Dimensions:

Height: 1.7 inches (4.3 centimeters)

Width: 17.5 inches (44.5 centimeters)

Depth: 25 inches (63.5 centimeters)

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–9

General InformationI

Weight: 26 pounds (11.8 kilograms)

Power Requirements:

Input voltage: 100 to 230 VAC

Input Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz

Plan for single phase or phase-to-phase connections and 5-ampere dedicated service

Airflow Clearance in Rack:

Sides: None

Top and Bottom: None

Front and Rear: 3.0 inches (7.6 centimeters)

Heat Dissipation:

410 BTU/Hr

Shock and Vibration Tolerance:

60 Gs for 10 milliseconds without nonrecoverable errors

Acoustical Noise:

70 dB “A” scale

Inclination:

10

°

maximum

Storage and Shipping Environment

Protective packaging must be provided to protect the switch under all shipping methods (domestic and international).

Shipping temperature:

-40

°

F to 140

°

F (-40

°

C to 60

°

C)

Storage temperature:

34

°

F to 140

°

F (1

°

C to 60

°

C)

Shipping relative humidity:

5% to 100%

Storage relative humidity:

1–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

5% to 80%

Maximum wet-bulb temperature:

84

°

F (29

°

C)

Altitude:

40,000 feet (12,192 meters)

Operating Environment

Temperature:

40

°

F to 104

°

F (4

°

C to 40

°

C)

Relative humidity:

8% to 80%

Maximum wet-bulb temperature:

81

°

F (27

°

C)

Altitude:

10,000 feet (3,048 meters)

HAFM Server Description

The HAFM server ( Figure 1–1

) is a notebook personal computer (PC) that provides a central point of control for up to 48 LAN-connected directors or edge switches.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–11

General InformationI

Figure 1–4: HAFM Server

The server is mounted in a slide-out drawer in an HP-supplied equipment rack. The

HAFM server or Internet access to the embedded web server interface is required to install, configure, and manage the switch.

Although a configured switch operates normally without HAFM server intervention, an attached server should operate at all times to monitor switch operation, log events and configuration changes, and report failures.

The HAFM server provides an auto-detecting 10/100 Mbps LAN connection, provided by an internal Ethernet adapter card. This LAN port attaches to the customer’s public intranet to allow access from remote user workstations. An optional

Ethernet adapter card (not supplied by HP) can be installed in the personal computer memory card international association (PCMCIA) slot to provide a connection to a private LAN segment for dedicated switch communication.

HAFM Server Specifications

The following list summarizes hardware specifications for the HAFM server notebook platform. Current platforms may ship with more enhanced hardware, such as a faster processor, additional random- access memory (RAM), or a higher-capacity hard drive or removable disk drive.

• HP Omnibook 6200 PC with color monitor, keyboard, keyboard-mounted trackpad (mouse), and U. S. power cord.

• Intel

®

Pentium III™ processor with an 800 megahertz (MHz) or greater clock speed, running the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system.

1–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Eighteen gigabyte (GB) or greater internal hard drive.

• 160 megabyte (MB) or greater RAM.

• Removable DVD/CD-ROM drive.

• Removable 100 MB disk (Zip

®

) drive.

• 56K internal modem.

• One internal 10/100 Mbps Ethernet adapter with RJ-45 connector (provides public

LAN interface to switches and remote clients).

Ethernet Hub

The HAFM Server and managed switches connect through a rack- mounted 10/100

Base-T Ethernet hub. Figure 1–5

illustrates the optional 12-port hub.

Power

Fault

Reset

1

2

7 8

3 4

5 6

9 10

11 12

Link

100

Link

100

Act

Col

Port 1 Only

1

MDI-X

(out)

MDI

(in)

7X

2X

8X

3X

9X

4X

10X

5X

11X

6X

12X

Figure 1–5: 12-Port Ethernet Hub

Embedded Web Server Interface

Administrators or operators with a browser-capable PC and an Internet connection can monitor and manage the switch through an embedded web server interface. The application provides a graphical user interface (GUI) similar to the product manager application, and supports switch configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic operation.

Maintenance Approach

Whenever possible, the maintenance approach instructs service personnel to perform fault isolation and repair procedures without degrading or interrupting operation of the switch, attached devices, or associated applications. Switch fault isolation begins when one or more of the following occur:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–13

General InformationI

• System event information displays at the attached HAFM server, a remote workstation communicating with the HAFM server, or the embedded web server interface.

• LEDs on the switch front panel or FRUs illuminate to indicate a hardware malfunction.

• An unsolicited SNMP trap message is received at a management workstation, indicating an operational state change or failure.

• Notification of a significant system event is received at a designated support center through an e-mail message or the call-home feature.

System events can be related to a:

• Switch or HAFM server failure (hardware or software).

• Ethernet LAN communication failure between the switch and HAFM server

• Link failure between a port and attached device.

• ISL failure or segmentation of an E_port.

Fault isolation and service procedures vary depending on the system event information provided. Fault isolation and related service information is provided through maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs) documented in Chapter 3. MAPs consist of step-by-step procedures that prompt service personnel for information or describe a specific action to be performed. MAPs provide information to interpret system event information, isolate a switch failure to a single FRU, remove and replace the failed FRU, and verify switch operation. The fault isolation process normally

begins with " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7.

Ensure the correct switch is selected for service (if the HAFM server manages multiple switches or other Hewlett Packard products) by enabling unit beaconing at the failed switch. The amber system error LED on the switch front panel blinks when beaconing is enabled. Instructions to enable beaconing are incorporated into MAP steps.

Remote Workstation Configurations

Using a standard web browser, the HAFM and product manager applications can be downloaded and installed on remote user workstations that are LAN-attached to the

HAFM server. Operators at these workstations can manage and monitor switches controlled by the HAFM server. A maximum of nine concurrent users (including a local user) can log in to the HAFM application.

1–14

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Each remote workstation must have access to the LAN segment on which the HAFM server is installed. Switch administrative functions are accessed through the LAN and

HAFM server. The LAN interface can be:

• Part of the customer’s public 10/100 Mbps LAN segment that provides access to managed switches. This switch-to-HAFM server LAN connection is part of the equipment rack installation and is required. Connection of remote workstations through the hub is optional. This type of network configuration using one Ethernet connection through the HAFM server is shown in

Figure 1–6 .

This single-Ethernet connection is supported by HP, is Open View-Storage Node

Manager (OV-SNM) compatible, and is the recommended configuration for a typical HP installation at a customer site. LAN security is provided by restricting password access and disabling the SNMP agent, embedded Web server interface, and command line interface (telnet access) for each managed switch.

NOTE: The Ethernet adapter in the HAFM server provides an auto-detecting 10/100 Mbps connection. Depending on speed restrictions imposed by other LAN-attached devices, the LAN segment that connects the HAFM server to manage directors and switches operates at either ten or 100 Mbps.

Switch HAFM Server

StorageWorks d irector 2/64

RST

10/100

PWR

ERR

Remote

Workstation

RST

10/100

StorageWorks d irector 2/64

Switch

Figure 1–6: Typical Network Configuration (One Ethernet Connection)

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–15

General InformationI

• Part of a second HAFM server interface that connects to a customer’s private intranet and allows operation of the product manager application from remote user

PCs or workstations. Connection to this LAN segment is optional and depends on customer requirements. A network configuration using both Ethernet connections is shown in

Figure 1–7 .

RST

10/100

31 29

30

28

27

26

25

23

24

22

21

20

19 17

18 16

15

13 11

14 12

10

PWR

ERR

Switch

HAFM

Server

Power

Fault

ProCurve 10/100 Hub12

HP J3294A

Reset

Link

100

100

Act Col

MDI-X

(out)

Port 1 Only

MDI

(in)

HP Hub

10X 11X

12X

Remote

Workstation

RST

10/100 31

29

30 28

27

25

26 24

23

21 19

22 20 18

17

16

15 13

14

12

11

10 Switch

Remote

Workstation

Figure 1–7: Typical Network Configuration (Two Ethernet Connections)

• Although this dual Ethernet connection is supported by HP, it is not OV-SNM compatible, requires installation of an additional PCMCIA LAN adapter card (not supplied by HP), and is not the recommended configuration for a typical new HP installation at a customer site.

Refer to the hp StorageWorks product in a SAN environment: planning guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32

(A6534-96025/AA-RS2DA-TE) for additional information about network configurations.

CAUTION: Prior to servicing a switch or HAFM server, determine the Ethernet LAN configuration. Installation of switches and the HAFM server on a public customer intranet can complicate problem determination and fault isolation.

Minimum Remote Console Hardware Specifications

Client HAFM and product manager applications download and install to remote workstations (from the HAFM server) using a standard web browser. The applications operate on platforms that meet the following minimum system requirements:

1–16

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Desktop or notebook PC with color monitor, keyboard, and mouse, using an Intel

Pentium

®

processor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, and using the

Microsoft Windows

®

95, Windows

®

98, Windows

®

2000, Windows XP, or Linux

2.2 operating system.

• UNIX workstation with color monitor, keyboard, and mouse, using a:

— Hewlett-Packard

®

HA PA-RISC

®

processor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, using the HP-UX

®

11 or higher operating system.

— Sun

®

Microsystems UltraSPARC™-II processor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, using the SunOS™ version 5.5.1 or higher operating system, or

Solaris™ version 2.5.1 or higher operating system.

— IBM PowerPC

®

microprocessor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, or

POWER3™ microprocessor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, using the

AIX version 4.3.3 or higher operating system.

• At least 24 MB available on the internal hard drive.

• 128 MB or greater RAM.

• Video card supporting 256 colors at 800 x 600 pixel resolution.

• Ethernet network adapter.

• Java™-enabled Internet browser, such as Microsoft

®

4.0 or later) or Netscape Navigator

®

Internet Explorer (version

(version 4.0 or later).

Field Replaceable Units

The switch provides a modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of

FRUs small form factor pluggable SFP optical transceivers, power supplies, and fans.

Figure 1–8 illustrates the front of the switch. The switch front panel includes:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–17

General InformationI

IML

StorageWorks edge switch 2/16

1 2

5 Initial machine load (IML) button

6 Ethernet LAN connector

7 SFP fiber optic connectors

3 4 6

8 Port LEDs

9 Error LED (amber)

10 Power LED (green)

Figure 1–8: Edge Switch 2/16 (front view)

2 3

3

2

PWR

ERR

5

1–18

1 4

1 Cooling fan (4)

2 Power supply (2)

3 Power switches on power supplies (2)

4 RS-232 maintenance port

Figure 1–9: Edge Switch 2/16 (rear view)

Figure 1–9 illustrates the rear of the switch. The FRUs on the rear panel include two

power supplies and three individual cooling fan FRUs with each fan FRU comprised of two individual fans.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

SFP Transceivers

A single-mode or multi-mode fiber-optic cable attaches to a port through a pluggable small form factor (SFP) transceiver. The SFP provides a duplex LC interface, and can be detached from the switch port for easy replacement. Two fiber-optic transceiver types are available:

• Shortwave laser—Shortwave laser SFPs provide short-distance connections (2 to

500 meters) through 50-micron or 62.5-micron multi-mode fiber.

• Longwave laser—Longwave laser SFPs provide long-distance connections (up to

10 kilometers) through 9-micron single-mode fiber.

• Extended reach laser—Extended reach laser SFPs provide long-distance connections (up to 35 kilometers) through 9-micron single-mode fiber.

Cooling Fans

Three 2-fan FRUs (a total of six fans) provide cooling for the switch power supplies and the control processor (CTP) card, as well as redundancy for continued operation if a single fan fails.

Each fan FRU can be replaced while the switch is operating.

Power Supplies

Redundant, load-sharing power supplies step down and rectify facility input power to provide 3.3 volts direct current (VDC), 5 VDC, and 12 VDC to the CTP card. The power supplies also provide input filtering, overvoltage protection, and overcurrent protection. Either power supply can be replaced while the switch is operational.

Each power supply has a separate CTP card connection to allow for independent AC power sources. The power supplies are input-rated at 100 to 230 volts alternating current (VAC).

Connectors and Indicators

Connectors and indicators include the:

• Initial machine load (IML) button.

• Ethernet LAN connector.

• Green power (PWR) and amber system error (ERR) LEDs.

• Green and amber status LEDs associated with FRUs.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–19

General InformationI

• RS-232 maintenance port.

Initial Machine Load Button

When the IML button (

Figure 1–8

) is pressed and held for three seconds, the switch performs an IML that takes approximately 30 seconds and resets the:

• Microprocessor and functional logic for the CTP card and loads firmware from

FLASH memory.

• Ethernet LAN interface, causing the connection to the HAFM server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.

• Ports, causing all Fibre Channel connections to drop momentarily until the connections automatically recover.

An IML should only be performed if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not IML the switch unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support. As a precaution, the IML button is flush mounted to protect against accidental activation.

Ethernet LAN Connector

The front panel provides a 10/100 megabit per second (Mbps) RJ-45 twisted-pair connector (

Figure 1–8 ) that attaches to an Ethernet LAN to provide communication

with the HAFM server or an SNMP management workstation. Two green LEDs are associated with the LAN connector. When illuminated, the left LED indicates LAN operation at 10 Mbps, and the right LED indicates LAN operation at 100 Mbps.

Power and System Error LEDs

The PWR LED ( Figure 1–8

) illuminates when the switch is connected to facility AC power and powered on. If the LED extinguishes, a facility power source, power cord, or power distribution failure is indicated.

The ERR LED (

Figure 1–8 ) illuminates when the switch detects an event requiring

immediate operator attention, such as a FRU failure. The LED remains illuminated as long as an event is active. The LED extinguishes when the Clear System Error Light function is selected from the product manager application. The LED blinks if unit beaconing is enabled. An illuminated ERR LED (indicating a failure) takes precedence over unit beaconing.

1–20

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

FRU Status LEDs

Amber and green LEDs associated with switch FRUs provide status information as follows:

• Port SFP - Amber and green LEDs to the left of the port (

Figure 1–8 ) illuminate,

extinguish, or blink to indicate various port states (operational with active Fibre

Channel traffic, operational but not communicating, beaconing, blocked, failed, inactive, or running diagnostics).

•

Fan - An amber LED at the upper left corner of each fan FRU ( Figure 1–9

) illuminates if the fan fails or rotates too slowly.

• Power Supply - A green LED on each power supply (

Figure 1–9 ) illuminates if

the power supply is operational and receiving AC power.

Maintenance Port

The rear panel provides a 9-pin RS-232 maintenance port (

Figure 1–9 ) that provides a

connection for a local terminal or dial-in connection for a remote terminal. Although the port is typically used by authorized maintenance personnel, operations personnel can use the port to configure switch network addresses.

Software Diagnostic Features

The switch provides the following diagnostic software features that aid in fault isolation and repair of problems:

• FRUs provide on-board diagnostic and monitoring circuits that continuously report FRU status to the HAFM and product manager applications. These applications provide system alerts and logs that display failure and diagnostic information at the HAFM server or a remote workstation communicating with the

HAFM server.

• The HAFM Services application that runs as a Windows 2000 service and provides an additional user interface to display operational status.

• The embedded web server interface that provides Internet access to isolate problems for a single switch.

• Unsolicited SNMP trap messages that indicate operational state changes or failures can be transmitted to up to 12 authorized management workstations.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–21

General InformationI

• E-mail messages or call-home reports from the HAFM server provide automatic notification of significant system events to designated support personnel or administrators.

HAFM Diagnostics

The HAFM application provides a Java-based GUI to manage, monitor, and isolate problems for multiple switches and multi-switch fabrics. The user interface operates locally on the HAFM server, or through an Ethernet LAN connection from a remote user workstation. The application starts automatically when the HAFM server is powered on or rebooted, and the default display is the main HAFM window, or

Product View ( Figure 1–10 ). If you are using a remote user workstation, see Log Into

the HAFM in the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager user guide

(A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE). Managed products (including switches) appear as icons in the window, and a set of view tabs appear at the top of the window. A status bar displays below the view area of the screen.

Figures containing HAFM and product manager screens in this manual are included for illustration purposed only. These illustrations may not match exactly what you see through your server or workstation. Title bars have been removed from the illustrations, and fields in the illustrations may contain different data than the screens displayed on your system.

NOTE: Icons shown in the Product View will vary, based on what is installed in the particular fabric being represented.

The HAFM application is independent from the switch or other products managed by the HAFM server. Service personnel can perform the following maintenance and diagnostic functions:

• Display the operational status for each managed product.

• Display logs that provide service and diagnostic-related information.

• Open a product manager application to monitor or fault-isolate a specific switch.

• Select the Products tab to view hardware, node list, port list, performance, and

FRU list views and to configure and diagnose hardware problems.

• Select the Fabrics tab to monitor or fault-isolate multi-switch fabric problems.

1–22

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Figure 1–10: Product View

HAFM Status Symbols

A status bar at the bottom of the Product View displays a colored symbol that indicates the worst-case status of any managed product in the Product View, that fabrics are persisted in the Fabrics View (double-click the Fabrics tab), and the status

of the HAFM server. Table 1–1

illustrates and explains the meaning of the status symbols. If a switch is degraded but all other managed products are fully operational, a yellow triangle displays in the status bar, and adjacent to the icon representing the degraded switch. The remaining icons have a green circle adjacent to them. By double-clicking an icon or selecting from the View menu, service personnel can open a specific product manager application.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–23

General InformationI

A label below each icon identifies the switch by its configured name or IP address, and a colored status symbol beside each icon indicates the operational status of the switch.

Table 1–1: Status Symbols

Alert Symbol

Green circle

Yellow triangle

Red diamond

(with yellow background)

Grey square

Meaning

Status Bar: All managed products are fully operational and no failures are indicated.

Next to Icon: The switch is fully operational and no failures are indicated.

Status Bar: At least one managed product is operating in degraded mode.

Next to Icon: A redundant component failed or the switch is operating in degraded mode. Service is required.

Status Bar: At least one managed product is not operational.

Next to Icon: A critical failure occurred and the switch is not operational. Immediate service is required.

Status Bar: The status of at least one managed product is unknown.

Next to Icon: The switch status is unknown because of a network connection failure between the switch and HAFM server.

Hardware View Layout and Function

Double-click a switch icon on the Product View to open the product manager for that switch. When the application opens, the default display is the Hardware View

(

Figure 1–11 ). The main product manager window (Hardware View) is divided into

five main areas as shown in

Figure 1–11 menu bar, view tabs, status table, view panel,

and status bar. Use features in these panels to configure switch operation, monitor performance, and access maintenance features.

Menu Bar

The menu bar on the product manager window displays tabs for the following menus:

• Product

• Configure

• Logs

• Maintenance

1–24

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Help

Click one of the tabs to display a list of menu options. Click an option to open a dialog box that allows you to perform configuration and maintenance tasks and view logs. If a menu option contains a check box, click in the box to add a check mark and enable a function. Click a check box containing a check mark to remove the check mark and disable the function.

Product Manager Diagnostics

The product manager application provides a Java-based GUI to manage, monitor, and isolate problems for a specific switch. The application operates locally on the HAFM server, or through an Ethernet LAN connection from a remote user workstation.

Hardware View

The hardware view (

Figure 1–11

)illustrates the following elements:

1 Menu Bar

2 View Tabs

3 View Panel

4 Status Bar

Figure 1–11: Hardware View

Service personnel can perform the following maintenance and diagnostic functions from the application:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–25

General InformationI

• Observe the operational status and state, name, description, and location for the selected switch at the status table at the top of the Hardware View.

• Observe green and amber LEDs that illuminate on graphical FRUs. These LEDs emulate LED operation on corresponding switch FRUs.

• Observe graphical FRUs that emulate the hardware configuration and operational status of the corresponding switch. Colored symbols appear on graphical FRUs to represent failed or degraded status. The colors and shapes are consistent with other status displays.

• Select a view tab to perform maintenance functions or display logs that provide service and diagnostic-related information.

• Select graphical FRUs with the mouse to display maintenance-related dialog boxes or perform maintenance functions.

Status Table

The switch status table displays the selected switch operational status, operational state, port state, name, description, and location. The Status field shows one of the following:

• Fully Operational - all switch FRUs and ports are fully operational, and no failures are indicated.

• Redundant Failure - a redundant FRU failed (power supply or fan FRU) and the switch is operational. In addition to the text message, the Status and State fields change to a yellow background (refer to

Figure 1–12, Hardware View ).

• Minor Failure - a failure occurred that decreased the operational capability of the switch (port SFP failure), but has not affected normal switching operations. In addition to the text message, the Status and State fields change to a yellow background (refer to

Figure 1–12

).

• Not Operational - the switch failed, is not operational, and requires immediate service. In addition to the text message, the Status and State fields change to a yellow background (refer to

Figure 1–12 ).

• No Link - if the switch-to-HAFM server link is down, No Link appears in the

Status field, the Status and State fields change to a yellow background, the Name,

Description, and Location fields do not display, and the State field changes to a

Reason field with a brief description of the link loss condition. For a description of link loss conditions, refer to

MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication on page 2–39

.

The State field shows one of the following:

1–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Online - when the switch is set online, an unblocked port and all unbypassed ports are awaiting device login and are able to attach to a device. This state is configured through the Set Online State dialog box or following an IML.

• Offline - when the switch is set offline, all ports are offline and cannot accept a login from an attached device that requires a switch connection. This state is configured through the Set Online State dialog box.

• Coming online - this is a transitional state that occurs just prior to the switch going online. Unless a problem occurs, this state appears only briefly. The switch automatically transitions through this state after a power-up or reset procedure.

• Going offline - this is a transitional state that occurs just prior to the switch going offline. Unless a problem occurs, this state appears only briefly.

LED Emulation

At the Hardware View for the selected switch, simulated LEDs illuminate on FRUs and adjacent to port SFPs to emulate the operation of LEDs on the corresponding hardware. Simulated PWR and ERR LEDs also illuminate to emulate the operation of

LEDs on the corresponding switch front panel. For an explanation of LED operation, refer to

FRU Status LEDs

.

Product Manager Status Symbols

A status bar at the bottom of the window displays a colored symbol (green circle, yellow triangle, red diamond with yellow background, or grey square) that indicates the worst-case status of the selected switch. The meaning of the status symbol is

consistent with the icon explanations in Table 1–1 .

As an example, for a single SFP, fan, or power supply failure, a blinking red and yellow diamond displays at the FRU illustration in the Hardware View. However, the status bar displays a yellow triangle to indicate degraded operation. If a blinking red and yellow diamond displays over multiple FRUs, the status bar displays a red and yellow diamond, indicating a critical failure and the switch is not operational.

The following colored symbols overlay graphical FRUs to represent failed or degraded status for the corresponding switch FRU.

• Failed FRU indicator - a blinking (color reversing) red and yellow diamond overlaying a FRU indicates the FRU failed and immediate service is required.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–27

General InformationI

• Attention indicator - a yellow triangle overlaying the top of a port SFP indicates the port is in a nonstandard mode or configuration, but did not actually fail. The indicator appears for any port having a state other than online, failed, blocked, bypassed, or loss of light. The indicator also appears to indicate a link incident

(LIN) alert or a segmented port.

View Tabs

Click one of the view tabs across the top of the product manager window to display the following views in the View panel.

• Hardware

• Node List

• Port List

• Performance

• FRU List

View Panel

Views, selected from the view tabs, display in the view panel.

Hardware View

The Hardware View is the default view that displays in the view panel when you open the switch product manager. To return to this view from another view, click the

Hardware view tab. Refer to

Figure 1–12 for an example of this view.

1–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Figure 1–12: Hardware View

In the Hardware View, colored indicators reflect the status of actual LEDs on the switch FRUs. The status bar displays a symbol to represent the most degraded status currently reported by any of the switch FRUs. For example, for a port failure, indicated by a blinking red and yellow diamond on a port, a yellow triangle displays on the status bar to indicate a degraded condition. However, if a blinking red and yellow diamond displays over both power supplies, the status bar displays a blinking red and yellow diamond, which indicates a failure requiring immediate attention. For an explanation of the different status symbols and the reasons they display in the

Hardware View or Port List View, refer to

Table 1–1 .

Switch Menu

Double-click the switch graphic away from a FRU to display the Switch Properties dialog box. Right-click a hardware graphic away from a FRU to display the following options:

• Switch Properties

• Enable Unit Beaconing

• Clear System Error Light

• IPL Switch

• Set Switch Date and Time

• Set Switch Online State

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–29

General InformationI

Port Menu

Double-click a port to display the Port Properties dialog box. Right-click a port to display the following options:

• Node Properties

• Port Technology

• Block Port

• Enable Beaconing

• Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)

• Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)

• Port Diagnostics

• Clear Link Incident Alert(s)

• Reset Port

• Port Binding

• Clear Threshold Alert(s)

Note that these same options are available when you click a port on the Hardware

View and select the port secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.

NOTE: For Node Properties, if a node is not logged in a message box displays indicating that node information is not available.

Port List View

Select the Port List view tab. A table listing the port number, port name, port address

(S/390 mode only), the block/unblock configuration, operating state, port type, operating speed, and alert condition displays in the view panel.

Figure 1–13

shows an example of the Port List View.

1–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Figure 1–13: Port List View

The Port List View displays information about all ports installed in the switch. All data is dynamic and updates automatically. Double-click any row in this view to display the Port Properties dialog box for the port.

Right-click a port row to display the same menu options that display when you right-click a port in the Hardware View or a port’s bar graph in the Performance View.

These include:

• Port Properties

• Node Properties

• Port Technology

• Block Port

• Enable Beaconing

• Port Diagnostics

• Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)

• Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)

• Clear Link Incident Alert(s)

• Reset Port

• Port Binding

• Clear Threshold Alert(s)

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–31

General InformationI

Note that these options are also available when you click a port row and select the Port secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.

FRU List View

Select the FRU List view tab. A table with information about each of the FRUs installed in the switch displays in the view panel. All data is dynamic and updates automatically.

Figure 1–14

shows an example of the FRU List View.

1–32

Figure 1–14: FRU List View

Node List View

Select Node List from view tabs. Figure 1–15 on page 1-33 shows an example of the

Node List View. This view displays a table with information about all node attachments or N_Ports that have logged into existing F_Ports on the switch. Only

N_Ports display in the Node List View after nodes have logged in to the fabric. The

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI columns that display in the table include: port number where the node is attached, the port’s address (S/390 mode only), node type, WWN of the attached node (device), and

BB_Credit used by the attached node.

Double-click a port row to highlight it and display the Node Properties dialog box for that port.

Right-click a port row to display the following menu options:

• Node Properties: Displays the Node Properties dialog box.

• Port Properties: Displays the Port Properties dialog box.

• Define Nickname. Displays the Define Nickname dialog box, where you can define a nickname to display for the attached device instead of the device's 8-byte

WWN.

• Display options. Allows you to display attached devices listed under the Port

WWN column in the Node List View by the device’s nickname configured through the Define Nickname menu option or the device's WWN.

Figure 1–15: Node List View

Note that these options are also available when you click a port row, then select the

Port secondary menu from the Product tab on the menu bar.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–33

General InformationI

Performance View

Select the Performance view tab from the menu.

Figure 1–16

shows an example of the

Performance View. This view provides a graphical display of performance for all 16 ports. The top portion of the Performance View displays bar graphs that show the level of transmit/receive activity for each port. This information updates every five seconds.

Each bar graph also shows the percentage link utilization for the port. A red arrow marks the highest utilization level reached since the Performance View was opened. If the system detects activity on a port, it represents minimal activity with at least one bar.

When an end device (node) is logged into a port, moving the cursor over the port’s bar graph in the Performance View highlights the graph and displays a message with the world-wide name of the connected node. If the connected node has more than one port, this is the world-wide name of the specific port on the node. When a port is functioning as an expansion port (E_Port), the message is “E_Port.” When a port is not logged into an end-device (not functioning as an F_Port) or to another switch (not functioning as an E_Port), the message is the port’s current online state.

1–34

Figure 1–16: Performance View

Right-click a bar graph to display a menu of port-related actions. The options available on this menu are the same as those that are available when you right-click a port in the Hardware View or right-click a row in the Port List View. These include:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Port Properties

• Node Properties

• Port Technology

• Block Port

• Enable Beaconing

• Port Diagnostics

• Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)

• Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)

• Clear Link Incident Alert(s)

• Reset Port

• Port Binding

• Clear Threshold Alert(s)

Note that these same options are also available when you click a port’s graph, then select the Port secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.

The bottom portion of the Performance View displays cumulative statistical information for the port selected in the bar graph. Click the Refresh button to update the data with current data from the port.

Click the Clear button to clear all of the counters to zero for the selected port and to place an entry in the audit log indicating that statistics for the port have been cleared.

NOTE: Clearing the counters clears the statistics for all users.

Status Bar

The status bar is located along the bottom of the product manager window. This includes a symbol that displays at the left side of the bar and messages that display in the panel to the right of the symbol. The symbol indicates the current operating status of the switch and the messages display to provide more description of menu options as you move the cursor over the options under menu bar menus. Refer to

Table 1–2 for the

meaning of these status symbols and of the corresponding alert text that displays in the

Edge-16 Status table at the top of the Hardware View in the view panel.

If a gray square displays in the status bar (no Ethernet connection), a reason for the status displays in the Status table at the top of the Hardware View.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–35

General InformationI

1–36

Table 1–2: Operating Status - Status Bar and Switch Status Table

Symb ol

Status

Bar

Green

Circle

Yellow

Triangle

Blinking

Red and

Yellow

Diamond

Gray

Square

Switch Status

Table Text

Fully Operational

Meaning

All components and installed ports are operational; no failures.

Redundant Failure A redundant component has failed, such as a power supply, and the backup component has taken over operation.

Minor Failure A failure occurred which has decreased the switch operational ability. Normal switching operations are not affected.

One or more ports failed, but at least one port is still operational.

A fan has failed or is not rotating sufficiently.

NOT

OPERATIONAL

Never Connected

Link Timeout

Protocol Mismatch

Duplicate Session

Unknown Network

Address

Incorrect Product

Type

A critical failure prevents the switch from performing fundamental switching operations.

All fans failed.

All installed ports failed.

Both power supplies failed.

Switch status is unknown. This occurs if the Ethernet network connection between the

HAFM server and the switch cannot be established or if the

CTP fails.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Messages display to the right of the status symbol as you move the cursor over options under the menu bar menus. These messages provide additional details about tasks that you can perform through the menu option.

Fabrics View

Access the Fabrics View by clicking the Fabrics tab on the HAFM application window. The left panel of this view is the Fabric Tree, which is the expandable list of fabrics, products in fabrics, and nodes connected to products. The view area for the tab is to the right of the Fabric Tree.

Click the Topology and Zone Set tabs at the bottom of the view area to change the views. The Topology tab (default) is illustrated in

Figure 1–17

and the Zone Sets tab is illustrated in

Figure 1–18

.

Figure 1–17: Fabrics View - Topology Tab

Topology Tab

The view area of the Topology tab provides details on all fabrics known to the HAFM server and HAFM application. This area displays product icons like those in the

Products view, each representing switches and directors in fabrics that you select from a Fabric Tree on left panel of the view. Interswitch links (ISLs) display between the product icons as black lines. Fabrics are initially listed in the Fabric Tree by the world

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–37

General InformationI wide name (WWN) of the fabric’s principal switch, but if the fabric is “persisted,” they could have various names configured by the user. The selected fabric’s name displays above the icons at the top of the tab.

Zone Set Tab

This tab displays the currently active zone set for fabrics that you select from the left side of the view. The zones and zone members that make up the zone set display in a scrollable tree structure below the name of the active zone set. Menu options available in this tab allow you to quickly determine fabric zoning structure (zone sets, zones, and zone members), determine logged in and logged out zone members, save active zones under another name, determine the default zone members, deactivate/activate zone sets, and change the default zone

.

Figure 1–18: Fabrics View - Zone Sets Tab

HAFM Services Application

The hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) Services application provides both a central control point and server-side functionality (in a client-server environment) for all Hewlett Packard managed products. The application runs as a Windows 2000 service and starts automatically when the HAFM server is powered on.

1–38

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

The user interface consists of the HAFM Services window (

Figure 1–19

), which provides HAFM application status and diagnostic information. The HAFM Services window consists of:

• An event table that displays HAFM Services events that occurred since the

HAFM application was started.

• A status line at the bottom of the panel that provides a status indicator and message area.

Figure 1–19: HAFM Services Window

Event Table

The event table displays the last ten events that occurred since the HAFM application was started. Events that occurred during a prior instance of the application do not display. If a new event occurs while ten events display, the oldest event is discarded. A deeper event history is maintained in the form of a log file viewed through the HAFM application.

The events are internal error conditions detected by the HAFM application, and are not related to product-specific events reported by a switch. Events typically relate to

HAFM audit log and file corruption, invalid product definition and firmware files, missing product services class, or missing version information.

The event table contains the following columns:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–39

General InformationI

• Viewed - this column provides a check box associated with each event. Each check box allows service personnel to mark an event as viewed (acknowledged with appropriate action taken).

• Date/Time - the date and time the event was reported to the HAFM server.

• Product - the product associated with the event. Some events are associated with the HAFM application, while others are associated with a specific instance of the product manager application. In the latter case, the switch and configured name

(or IP address) associated with the instance are displayed.

• Event - the numeric event code and a brief description of the event.

Status Line

The status line provides a status indicator and message area. HAFM status symbols are explained in

Table 1–3

.

The HAFM application icon (upper left corner of the window) is dynamic and matches the status indicator. This feature allows users and service personnel to observe the status when the application is minimized to the Windows 2000 task bar.

The message area briefly displays messages during HAFM application startup to indicate the progress of startup activities.

Table 1–3: HAFM Services Status Symbols

Alert Symbol

Blank

Meaning

The status indicator is blank during HAFM application initialization.

Green circle

Yellow triangle

All events are viewed (acknowledged with appropriate action taken).

One or more nonfatal events have not been viewed.

Red diamond

(with yellow background)

A fatal error occurred.

1–40

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

Embedded Web Server Diagnostics

If the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) server access is not available, the embedded web server interface provides a GUI accessed through the Internet (locally or remotely) to manage, monitor, and isolate problems for a single switch. This interface is available with switch firmware Version 1.2 (or later) installed, and does not replace nor offer the full management capability of the HAFM and switch product manager applications.

The embedded web server interface can be opened from a standard web browser running Netscape Navigator

®

4.6 or higher or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher. At the browser, enter the IP address of the switch as the Internet uniform resource locator (URL). When prompted at a login screen, enter a user name and password. When the interface opens, the default display is the View panel. Service personnel can perform the monitoring, configuration, maintenance and diagnostic functions as follows:

• View panel - quickly inspect and determine the operational status of the switch, and inspect switch properties and operating parameters, FRU properties, and Fibre

Channel port properties.

• Configure panel - configure or change:

— Switch ports.

— Switch identification, date and time, operating parameters, and network addresses.

— SNMP trap message recipients.

— User passwords.

• Monitor panel - inspect and monitor:

— Fibre Channel ports and port performance statistics.

— The active zone set.

— Event log entries, and clear the IML LED at the front panel.

— Information about attached devices (nodes).

• Operations panel - perform the following operations and maintenance tasks:

— Enable port beaconing and perform port diagnostics (internal and external loopback tests).

— Reset Fibre Channel ports.

— Set the switch online state.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–41

General InformationI

— Upgrade switch firmware.

General tasks performed through the web server interface are similar in form and function to tasks performed through the HAFM and product manager applications, and are therefore not documented in this publication. For task information and descriptions, open the online user documentation (Help selection) that supports the interface.

This publication provides instructions for switch installation and fault isolation using the embedded web server interface. Refer to the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16

installation guide, (A7284-96001/AA-RSU2A-TE) for installation and configuration tasks. Refer to

Chapter 2 for fault isolation tasks.

SNMP Trap Message Support

Unsolicited SNMP trap messages that indicate switch operational state changes or failure conditions can be customer-configured to be transmitted to up to 12 management workstations. If installed on a dedicated Ethernet LAN, the workstations communicate directly with each switch. If installed on a customer intranet, the workstations communicate with switches through the HAFM server.

SNMP data and trap messages are defined in the Fibre Channel FE-MIB definition, a subset of the TCP/IP MIB-II definition (RFC1213), and a custom, switch-specific

MIB. Customers can install these MIBs (in standard ASN.1 format) on any SNMP management workstation.

Although SNMP trap messages are typically transmitted to customer personnel only, the messages may be provided to service personnel as initial notification of a switch problem or as information included in the fault isolation process. Generic SNMP traps include:

• coldStart - reports that the SNMP agent is reinitializing due to a switch reset.

• warmStart - reports that the SNMP agent is reinitializing due to a switch IPL.

• authorizationFailure - reports access by an unauthorized SNMP manager. This trap is configurable, and is disabled by default.

Switch-specific SNMP traps specified in the custom MIB include Fibre Channel port operational state changes and FRU operational state changes.

If authorized through the Configure SNMP dialog box in the product manager application, users at SNMP management workstations can modify MIB variables.

Switch modifications performed through SNMP management work stations are recorded in the associated switch Audit Log and are available through the product manager application.

1–42

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

For additional information, refer to the hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32

(A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE).

E-Mail and Call-Home Support

If e-mail notification and call-home support are configured for the switch as part of the customer support process, service personnel may be:

• Notified of a switch problem by e-mail message, either directly or through a system administrator at the customer site or call center.

• Assigned a service call from call center personnel upon receipt and confirmation of a switch call-home event.

Tools and Test Equipment

This section describes tools and test equipment that may be required to install, test, service, and verify operation of the switch and attached HAFM server.

Tools Supplied with the Switch

The following tools are supplied with the switch. Use of the tools may be required to perform one or more installation, test, service, or verification tasks. These tools are supplied with the switch or must be supplied by service personnel.

• Fiber-optic loopback plug - An SFP multi-mode (shortwave laser) or single-mode

(longwave laser) loopback plug is required to perform port loopback diagnostic tests. One loopback plug is shipped with the switch, depending on the type of port transceivers installed. Both plugs are shipped if shortwave laser and longwave laser transceivers are installed. The plug is shown in

Figure 1–20 .

Figure 1–20: Multi-mode and Single-mode Loopback Plugs

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–43

General InformationI

• Fiber-optic protective plug - For safety and port transceiver protection, fiber-optic protective plugs must be inserted in all port SFPs without fiber-optic cables attached. The switch is shipped with protective plugs installed in all ports.

A protective plug is shown in Figure 1–21

.

Figure 1–21: Fiber-Optic Protective Plug

• Null modem cable - An asynchronous RS-232 null modem cable is required to configure switch network addresses and acquire event log information through the maintenance port. The cable has nine conductors and DB-9 male and female connectors. A null modem cable is not a standard (straight-through) RS-232 cable. Refer to

Figure 1–22 .

Figure 1–22: Null Modem Cable

Tools Supplied by Service Personnel

The following tools are expected to be supplied by service personnel performing switch installation and maintenance actions. Use of the tools may be required to perform one or more installation, test, service, or verification tasks.

• Scissors or pocket knife - A sharp cutting edge (scissors or knife blade) may be required to cut the protective strapping when unpacking the switch, HAFM server,

Ethernet hub, or replacement FRUs.

1–44

edge switch 2/16 service manual

General InformationI

• Standard flat-tip and cross-tip (Phillips) screwdrivers - Screwdrivers are required to remove, replace, adjust or tighten various connector or chassis components, and to remove and replace power supplies.

• Maintenance terminal (desktop or notebook PC) - the PC is required to configure switch network addresses and acquire event log information through the maintenance port. The PC must have:

— The Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows Millennium Edition operating system installed.

— RS-232 serial communication software (such as ProComm Plus™ or

HyperTerminal) installed. HyperTerminal is provided with Windows operating systems.

• Fiber-optic cleaning kit - The kit contains tools and instructions to clean fiber-optic cable, connectors, loopback plugs, and protective plugs.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

1–45

2

Diagnostics

This chapter describes diagnostic procedures used by service representatives to isolate hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16) problems or failures to the field-replaceable unit (FRU) level. The chapter specifically describes how to perform maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs).

Maintenance Analysis Procedures

The MAPs provide fault isolation and related service procedures. They are step-by-step procedures that prompt service personnel for information and describe a maintenance action. They provide information to interpret system events, isolate a switch failure to a single FRU, remove and replace the failed FRU, and verify switch operation.

Factory Defaults

Table 2–1

lists the defaults for the passwords, and IP, subnet, and gateway addresses.

Table 2–1: Factory-Set Defaults

Item

Customer password

Maintenance password

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway address

Default password level-2

10.1.1.10

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Quick Start

Table 2–2

lists the MAPs in this chapter. Fault isolation normally begins at " MAP 0000:

Start MAP " on page 2-7.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–1

Diagnostics

However,

Table 2–3 lists the event codes and the corresponding MAPs. It is a quick

start, if an event code is readily available.

Table 2–2: MAP Summary

MAP

MAP 0000: Start MAP

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis

MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis

MAP 0300: Console Application Problem

Determination

MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication

MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis

MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis

MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port

Problem Determination

MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination

Page

page 2–7

page 2–26

page 2–32

page 2–33

page 2–39

page 2–58

page 2–63

page 2–79

page 2–90

2–2

Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action

Event

Code

001

011

021

031

051

052

061

Explanation Action

System power-down.

Login server database invalid.

Name server database invalid.

Power on switch.

Go to MAP

0700 .

Go to MAP

0700 .

SNMP request received from unauthorized community.

Add community name.

Management server database invalid.

Go to MAP

0700 .

Management server internal error.

Go to MAP

0700 .

Fabric controller database invalid.

Go to MAP

0700 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code

062

070

071

072

080

200

201

202

203

204

206

207

208

300

301

302

303 exceeded.

Explanation

Maximum interswitch hop count

E_Port is segmented.

Switch is isolated.

E_Port connected to an unsupported switch.

Unauthorized world wide name

Power supply ac voltage failure.

Power supply DC voltage failure.

Power supply thermal failure.

Power supply ac voltage recovery.

Power supply DC voltage recovery.

Power supply removed.

Power supply installed.

Power supply false shutdown.

First cooling fan failed.

Second cooling fan failed.

Third cooling fan failed.

Fourth cooling fan failed.

Action

Go to MAP

0700 .

Go to MAP

0700 .

Go to MAP

0700 .

Go to MAP

0700 .

Go to MAP 0600

Go to MAP

0100 .

Go to MAP

0100 .

Go to MAP

0100 .

No action required.

No action required.

Replace FRU.

No action required.

Go to MAP

0100 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

2–3

Diagnostics

Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code

304

305

310

311

312

313

314

315

400

410

411

421

423

430

431

432

Explanation

Fifth cooling fan failed.

Sixth cooling fan failed.

First cooling fan recovered.

Second cooling fan recovered.

Third cooling fan recovered.

Fourth cooling fan recovered.

Fifth cooling fan recovered .

Sixth cooling fan recovered.

Power-up diagnostic failure.

CTP card reset.

Firmware fault occurred.

Firmware download complete.

CTP firmware download initiated.

Excessive Ethernet transmit errors.

Excessive Ethernet receive errors.

Ethernet adapter reset.

Action

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required.

No action required

Go to MAP

0200 .

No action required.

Go to MAP

0200 .

No action required.

No action required.

Go to MAP

0400 .

Go to MAP

0400 .

Go to MAP

0400 .

2–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code

433

440

502

504

505

506

507

508

510

512

513

514

581

582

583

584

Explanation

Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.

Embedded port hardware failure.

Port module anomaly detected.

Port module failure - error threshold exceeded.

Port module revision not supported.

Fibre Channel port failure.

Loopback diagnostics port failure.

No action required.

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.

Go to MAP

0600 .

SFP hot-insertion initiated.

SFP nonfatal error.

No action required.

Go to MAP

0600 .

SFP hot-removal completed.

SFP failure.

Implicit incident.

Bit-error threshold exceeded.

Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Not operational primitive sequence

(NOS) received.

Action

Go to MAP

0400 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

No action required.

Go to MAP

0600 .

No action required.

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

2–5

Diagnostics

Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)

Event

Code

585

586

602

604

605

800

801

802

805

806

807

810

811

812

850

Explanation

Primitive sequence timeout.

Invalid primitive sequence received for link state.

Action

Go to MAP

0600 .

Go to MAP

0600 .

SBAR module anomaly detected.

No action required.

SBAR module failure.

Go to MAP

0600 .

SBAR module revision not supported.

Go to MAP

0600 .

High-temperature warning (port module thermal sensor).

Critically hot temperature warning

(port module thermal sensor).

Port module shutdown due to thermal violations.

High-temperature warning (SBAR module thermal sensor).

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Critically hot temperature warning

(SBAR module thermal sensor).

SBAR module shutdown due to thermal violations.

High-temperature warning (CTP thermal sensor).

Critically hot temperature warning

(CTP thermal sensor).

CTP shutdown due to thermal violations.

System shutdown due to CTP thermal violations.

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

Go to MAP

0500 .

2–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

MAP 0000: Start MAP

This MAP describes initial fault isolation for the switch. Fault isolation begins at the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) server, failed switch, or

Internet-connected personal computer (PC) running the embedded web server interface.

1

Prior to fault isolation, acquire the following information from the customer:

• A system configuration drawing or planning worksheet that includes the HAFM server, switches, other Hewlett Packard products, and device connections.

• The location of the HAFM server and all switches.

• The internet protocol (IP) address, gateway address, and subnet mask for the switch reporting the problem.

• If performing fault isolation using the HAFM server:

— The Windows 2000 user name and password. These are required when prompted during any MAP or repair procedure that directs the HAFM server to be rebooted.

— The user name, maintenance password, and HAFM server name. All are case sensitive and required when prompted at the HAFMHAFM Login dialog box.

• If performing fault isolation using the embedded web server interface, the switch user name and password. Both are case sensitive and required when prompted at the Username and Password Required dialog box.

Continue.

2

Are you at the HAFM server?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 24 .

3

Did the HAFM server lock up or crash and:

• Display an application warning or error message, or

• Not display an application warning or error message, or

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–7

Diagnostics

• Display a Dr. Watson for Windows 2000 dialog box?

NO

↓

YES

An HAFM server application problem is indicated. Event codes are not

recorded. Go to " MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination " on page 2-33.

4

Did the HAFM server crash and display a blue screen with the system dump file in hexadecimal format (blue screen of death)?

NO

↓

YES

An HAFM server application problem is indicated. Event codes are not

recorded. Go to " MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination " on page 2-33.

5

Is the HAFM application active?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 7

.

6

Reboot the HAFM server PC.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears.

c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click

Yes to power off the PC.

d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in step 1 ) and click OK. The

HAFM Services and HAFM applications start, and the HAFM Login dialog box displays.

2–8

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server

name (obtained in step 1 , and all are case sensitive), and click Login. The

application opens and the Product View displays.

Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?

YES NO

↓

An HAFM server hardware problem is indicated. Event codes are not

recorded. Go to " MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination " on page 2-90.

7

Inspect the alert panel at the lower left corner of the Product View. The indicator shows the status of managed switches or the status of the link between the HAFM server and managed switches as follows:

• A green circle indicates all switches are operational.

• A yellow triangle indicates at least one switch is operating in degraded mode.

• A red diamond with yellow background indicates at least one switch is not operational.

• A grey square indicates the status of at least one switch is unknown

The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch because:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–9

Diagnostics

• The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.

• Ac power distribution in the switch failed.

• The control processor (CTP) card failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU,

CTP failure requires replacing the switch.

Does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 10 .

8

At the switch reporting the problem, ensure the power switch is set to the Power On

(1) position. Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

If no event codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page 2-26.

step 23 to obtain event codes.

9

Either a switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failure or CTP card failure is indicated.

Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event codes are found: a. Fault isolate the least severe failure indicated (Ethernet link problem). Go to

" MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication " on page 2-39.

b. If MAP 400 does not isolate the problem, fault isolate the CTP card problem. Go

to " MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis " on page 2-32.

10

Does a red diamond with yellow background (failure indicator) appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?

YES NO

2–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

↓

Go to

step 14 .

11

Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View displays. At the Hardware View:

• Observe whether the edge switch 2/16 Status table is yellow and switch status is

NOT OPERATIONAL.

• Inspect FRUs for a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) that overlays a FRU graphic.

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a Fibre Channel port graphic?

NO

↓

YES

A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

12

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a fan graphic?

NO

↓

YES

A fan failure is indicated. Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis " on page 2-58.

13

A blinking red and yellow diamond overlays a power supply graphic.

A power supply failure is indicated. Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page 2-26.

14

Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 18 .

15

Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View displays. At the Hardware View:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–11

Diagnostics

• Observe whether the edge switch 2/16 Status table is yellow and switch status is

Minor Failure or Not Installed.

• Inspect FRUs for a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) that overlays the FRU graphic.

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a Fibre Channel port graphic?

NO

↓

YES

A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

16

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a fan graphic?

NO

↓

YES

A fan failure is indicated. Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis " on page 2-58.

17

A blinking red and yellow diamond overlays a power supply graphic.

A power supply failure is indicated. Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page 2-26.

18

A green circle appears at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. Although the switch is operational, a minor problem may exist.

Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View displays. At the Hardware View, inspect ports for a yellow triangle (attention indicator) that overlays a port graphic.

Does a yellow triangle overlay the port graphic?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 22 .

19

Inspect the port state and LED status for all ports with an attention indicator.

2–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic with the attention indicator. The Port

Properties dialog box displays.

b. Inspect the Beaconing and Operational State fields.

Does the Operational State field display a Beaconing message and the Beaconing field display an On message?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 21 .

20

Port beaconing is enabled.

a. Consult with the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port beaconing is enabled.

b. Disable port beaconing:

1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.

2. Click Enable Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box adjacent to the option, and port beaconing is disabled.

Was port beaconing enabled because port failure or degradation was suspected?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–13

Diagnostics

Go to

step 2

.

21

At the Port Properties dialog box, does the Operational State field display a

Segmented E_Port message?

NO

↓

YES

E_Port segmentation is indicated. Go to

step 23 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port

Problem Determination " on page 2-79.

A message displays indicating a link incident or port problem. Go to

step 23

to obtain

event codes. If no event codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link

Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

22

A link incident may have occurred, but the LIN alerts option is not enabled for the port and the attention indicator does not appear.

At the Hardware View, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel. The Link Incident Log displays.

2–14

If a link incident occurred, the affected port number is listed with one of the following messages.

Link interface incident - implicit incident.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.

Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.

Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.

Did one of the listed messages appear in the Link Incident Log?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

A link incident problem is indicated. Go to

step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

23

Obtain event codes from the switch Event Log.

NOTE: If multiple event codes are found, note all codes and associated severity levels. Record the date, time, and listed sequence, and determine if the codes are related to the reported problem. Begin fault isolation with the most recent event code with the highest severity level.

Other codes may accompany this event code, or may indicate a normal indication after a problem is recovered.

a. At the Hardware View, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel. The Event Log displays.

b. Record the event code, date, time, and severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or

Severe).

c. Record all event codes that may relate to the reported problem.

Were one or more event codes found?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

Table 2–3 on page 2-2

.

Return to the MAP step that sent you here.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–15

Diagnostics

24

Are you at the switch reporting the problem?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 36 .

25

Is the PWR LED at the switch front panel illuminated?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 30 .

26

Is the power switch set to the Power On (1) position?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 29 .

27

Power on the switch. Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

step 23 to obtain event

codes. If no event codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution

Analysis " on page 2-26.

28

Is the PWR LED at the switch front panel illuminated?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 30 .

A faulty PWR LED is indicated, but Fibre Channel port operation is not disrupted.

2–16

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics a. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is acceptable to the customer, do not perform any repair action.

b. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is not acceptable to the customer, remove and replace the switch.

29

Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to

step 23 to obtain event

codes. If no event codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution

Analysis " on page 2-26.

A faulty PWR LED is indicated, but Fibre Channel port operation is not disrupted.

a. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is acceptable to the customer, do not perform any repair action.

b. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is not acceptable to the customer, remove and replace the switch.

Exit MAP.

30

Is the ERR LED blinking?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 32 .

31

Unit beaconing is enabled for the switch.

a. Consult the customer and next level of support to determine the reason unit beaconing is enabled.

b. Disable unit beaconing.

1. At the Hardware View, right-click the front bezel graphic (away from a FRU). A pop-up menu appears.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–17

Diagnostics

2. Click Enable Unit Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box adjacent to the option, and unit beaconing is disabled.

Was unit beaconing enabled because an switch failure or degradation was suspected?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

Go to

step 25 .

32

Is the ERR LED illuminated?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational. Verify operation at the HAFM server. Go to

step 3 .

33

Check FRUs (port SFPs, fans, power supplies) for failure symptoms.

Is the amber LED adjacent to a port SFP illuminated?

NO

↓

YES

A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

34

Is the amber LED at the lower left corner of a fan illuminated?

NO

↓

YES

A fan failure is indicated. Go to

step 23

to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis " on page 2-58.

35

Is the green LED on a power supply extinguished?

NO

↓

YES

A power supply failure is indicated. Go to

step 23 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page

2-26.

2–18

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

The switch appears operational.

36

Are you at a PC with a web browser (such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet

Explorer) and an Internet connection to the switch reporting the problem.

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 52 .

37

Is the web browser PC powered on and communicating with the switch through the

Internet connection?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 39 .

38

Boot the web browser PC.

a. Power on the PC in accordance with the instructions delivered with the PC. The

Windows desktop appears.

b. Launch the PC browser application by double-clicking the appropriate icon at the

Windows desktop.

c. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch

(obtained in

step 1 ). The Username and Password Required dialog box appears.

d. Type the user name and password obtained in step 1 , and click OK. The

embedded web server interface opens with the View panel (Switch tab) displayed.

Continue.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–19

Diagnostics

2–20

39

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the view panel displayed?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 44 .

40

A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found, or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC cannot communicate with the switch because:

• The switch-to-PC Internet link could not be established.

• AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.

• The switch’s CTP failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, CTP failure requires replacing the switch.

Continue.

41

Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to "

Analysis " on page 2-26.

MAP 0100: Power Distribution

42

Either a switch-to-PC Internet link problem (Internet too busy or IP address typed incorrectly) or a CTP card failure is indicated.

a. Wait approximately five minutes, then attempt to login to the switch again.

b. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch

(obtained in

step 1 ). The Username and Password Required dialog box appears.

c. Type the user name and password obtained in step 1 , and click OK. If the View

panel does not display, wait another five minutes and perform this step again.

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the View panel displayed?

YES NO

↓

A CTP card failure is indicated. Go to "

Analysis " on page 2-32.

MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure

43

At the View panel, inspect the Status field.

Does the switch status indicate Operational?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

44

Inspect the port operational state.

a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties tab) displays.

b. Inspect the Beaconing and Operational State fields.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–21

Diagnostics

2–22

Does the Operational State field display a Beaconing message and the Beaconing field display an On message?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 46 .

45

Port beaconing is enabled.

a. Consult the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port beaconing is enabled.

b. Disable port beaconing:

1. At the View panel, select Operations at the left side of the panel. The

Operations panel opens with the Port Beaconing page displayed.

2. Click the Beaconing State check box for the port. The check mark disappears from the box and port beaconing is disabled.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

3. Return to the View panel (Port Properties tab).

Continue.

46

At the View panel, does the Operational State field display a Segmented message?

NO

↓

YES

Port segmentation is indicated. Go to step 51 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port

Problem Determination " on page 2-79.

47

At the View panel, does the Operational State field display a message indicating a link incident or port problem?

NO

↓

YES

A port problem is indicated. Go to

step 51 to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

48

Repeat

step 44 through

step 47

for each remaining port.

Is a link incident or port problem indicated for any of the ports?

NO

↓

YES

A link incident problem or port SFP failure is indicated. Go to

step 51 to obtain

event codes. If no event codes are found, go to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and

Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

49

Inspect the power supply operational states.

a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel

(Component Properties tab) displays.

b.

Inspect the

State

fields for both power supplies.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–23

Diagnostics

2–24

Does the State field display a Failed message for either power supply?

NO

↓

YES

A power supply failure is indicated. Go to

step 51 to obtain event codes. If no

event codes are found, go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page

2-26.

50

Inspect the State fields for Fan 0, and Fan 1 through Fan 3 (fans).

Does the State field display a Failed or Not Installed message for any of the fans?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

A fan failure is indicated. Continue to the next step to obtain event codes. If no event

codes are found, go to " MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis " on page 2-58.

51

Obtain event codes from the embedded web server event log.

NOTE: If multiple event codes are found, note all codes and associated severity levels. Record the date, time, and listed sequence, and determine if the codes are related to the reported problem. Begin fault isolation with the most recent event code with the highest severity level.

Other codes may accompany this event code, or may indicate a normal indication after a problem is recovered.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics a. At the View panel, select Monitor at the left side of the panel. The Monitor panel opens with the Status page displayed.

b. At the Monitor panel, click the Log tab. The Monitor panel (Log tab) displays.

c. Record the event code, date, time, and severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or

Severe).

d. Record all event codes that may relate to the reported problem.

Were one or more event codes found?

YES NO

↓

Return to the MAP step that sent you here.

Go to

Table 2–3 on page 2-2 .

52

The link incident record provides the attached switch port number(s) and one or more of the following event codes and messages. Record all event codes that may relate to the reported problem.

581 - Link interface incident - implicit incident.

582 - Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.

583 - Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–25

Diagnostics

584 - Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.

585 - Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

586 - Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.

Were one or more event codes found?

YES NO

↓

Perform switch fault isolation at the HAFM server.

Go to

step 3

.

Go to

Table 2–3 on page 2-2 .

MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for the switch power distribution system, including defective AC power cords or power supplies.

1

Was an event code 200, 201, 202, or 208 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 3

.

2

The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and the associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Event

Code

200

201

202

208

Explanation Action

Power supply AC voltage failure.

Go to

step 6 .

Power supply DC voltage failure.

Go to

step 10

.

Power supply thermal failure.

Go to

step 10

.

Power supply false shutdown.

Go to

step 6 .

3

Is remote fault isolation being performed at the HAFM server?

YES NO

2–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

↓

Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server interface. Go to

step 20 .

4

Does inspection of a power supply indicate a failure (green LED extinguished)?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 6

.

5

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a power supply graphic at the HAFM server Hardware View?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 11 .

6

A redundant power supply is disconnected from facility AC power, not properly installed, or has failed.

Verify the indicated power supply is connected to facility power.

Ensure the AC power cord (PS0 or PS1) is connected to the rear of the switch and a facility power receptacle. If not, connect the cord as directed by the customer.

a. Ensure the associated facility circuit breaker is on. If not, ask the customer set the circuit breaker on.

b. Ensure the AC power cord is not damaged. If damaged, replace the cord.

Was a corrective action performed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 8

.

7

Verify power supply operation.

a. Inspect the power supply and ensure the green LED illuminates.

b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphic representing the power supply and ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.

Is a failure indicated?

YES NO

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–27

Diagnostics

↓

The switch appears operational.

8

Ensure the power supply is correctly installed and seated in the CTP card. If required, partially remove and reseat the power supply.

Was a corrective action performed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 10 .

9

Verify power supply operation.

a. Inspect the power supply and ensure the green LED illuminates.

b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphic representing the power supply and ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.

Is a failure indicated?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

10

A redundant power supply failed and must be removed and replaced. (

RRP: Power

Supply on page 4-4).

• This procedure is concurrent and can be performed while the switch is powered on.

• Perform the data collection procedure after FRU removal and replacement.

Did power supply replacement solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

11

At the Product View, does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?

The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch because:

2–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

• The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.

• AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.

• The switch’s CTP failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, CTP failure requires replacing the switch.

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

12

Ensure the power switch is set to the Power On (1) position. Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

NO

↓

YES

Analysis for an Ethernet link or CTP card failure is not described in this MAP.

Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the second time at this

step, contact the next level of support.

13

Verify facility AC power connections.

a. Ensure both AC power cords (PS0 and PS1) are connected to the rear of the switch and to facility power receptacles. If not, connect the cords as directed by the customer.

b. Ensure associated facility circuit breakers are on. If not, ask the customer set the circuit breakers on.

c. Ensure the AC power cords are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cords.

Was a corrective action performed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 15 .

14

Verify operation of both power supplies.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–29

Diagnostics a. Inspect the power supplies and ensure the green LEDs illuminate.

b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphics representing the power supplies and ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.

Is a failure indicated?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

15

Ensure both power supplies are correctly installed and seated in the CTP card. If required, partially remove and reseat the power supplies.

Was a corrective action performed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 17 .

16

Verify operation of both power supplies.

a. Inspect the power supplies and ensure the green LEDs illuminate.

b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphics representing the power supplies and ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.

Is a failure indicated?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

17

Inspect the switch for indications the power supplies are operational, but the switch is not receiving DC power. Indications include:

• Green LEDs illuminated on one or both power supplies.

• PWR and ERR LEDS extinguished at the switch front panel.

• All green and amber port LEDs extinguished.

Does the switch appear powered off while the power supplies appear operational (one or both power supply LEDs illuminated)?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 19 .

2–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

18

Both power supplies failed and must be removed and replaced (

RRP: Power Supply on page 4-4). Perform the data collection procedure after FRU removal and

replacement.

Did replacement of both power supplies solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

19

One or both power supplies appear operational, but the CTP card is not receiving DC power. An in-card circuit breaker may have tripped due to a power surge or the CTP card failed.

Reset the switch (" Reset the Switch " on page 3-36).

Did a switch reset solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

A CTP card failure is indicated. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch

20

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 22 .

21

A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found, or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC cannot communicate with the switch because:

• The switch-to-PC Internet (Ethernet) link could not be established.

• AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.

• The switch CTP card failed.

Go to

step 12 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–31

Diagnostics

22

Inspect the power supply operational states at the embedded web server interface.

a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel

(Component Properties tab) displays.

b. Inspect the State fields for Power Supply 0 and Power Supply 1.

Does the State field display a Failed or Not Installed message for either power supply?

NO

↓

YES

A redundant power supply failure is indicated. Go to

step 6 .

The switch appears operational.

MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis

When the switch is powered on, it performs a series of power-on self-tests (POSTs).

When POSTs complete, the switch performs an initial program load (IPL) that loads firmware and brings the unit online. This MAP describes fault isolation for problems that may occur during the POST/IPL process.

If an error is detected, the POST/IPL process continues in an attempt to initialize the switch and bring it online. But an event code 400 displays when the switch completes the POST/IPL process.

1

Was an event code 400 or 411 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for the failure is not described in this MAP. Go to "

MAP " on page 2-7.

MAP 0000: Start

2–32

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

2

The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and the associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Event

Code

400

411

Explanation

Power-up diagnostic failure.

Firmware fault occurred.

Action

Go to

step 3 .

Go to

step 4 .

3

POST/IPL diagnostics detected a CTP card failure as indicated by an event code 400 with supplementary bytes of event data.

• Byte 0 is a FRU code (02) that indicates a failed CTP card.

• Byte 1 is the slot number (00) for the CTP card.

Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch.

4

POST/IPL diagnostics detected a firmware failure (as indicated by event code 411) and performed an online dump. All Fibre Channel ports reset after the failure and attached devices momentarily logout, login, and resume operation.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

MAP 0300: Console Application Problem

Determination

This map describes isolation of HAFM server application problems, including problems associated with the Windows operating system and HAFM and switch product manager.

1

Did the HAFM server lock up or crash without displaying a warning or error message?

YES NO

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–33

Diagnostics

↓

Go to

step 4

.

2

An application or operating system problem is indicated. Close the HAFM application.

a. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete. The Windows Security dialog box displays.

b. At the Windows Security dialog box, click Task Manager. The Windows Task

Manager dialog box displays with the Applications page open.

c. Select (highlight) the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application entry and click End Task. The HAFM application closes.

Continue.

3

Attempt to clear the problem by rebooting the HAFM server PC.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows dialog box displays.

c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click

Yes to power off the PC.

d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog

box displays.

2–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server

name (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click Login. The

application opens and the Product View displays.

Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?

NO

↓

YES

The problem is transient and the HAFM server appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

4

Did the HAFM application display a dialog box with the message Connection to

HAFM server lost - click OK to exit application or HAFM error n (where n is an error message number 1 through 8 inclusive)?

NO

↓

YES

An HAFM application error occurred. Click OK to close the dialog box and

close the HAFM application. Go to step 3 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–35

Diagnostics

2–36

5

Did the HAFM application display a dialog box with the message The software version on this HAFM server is not compatible with the version on the remote

HAFM server?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 8

.

6

The HAFM applications running on the HAFM server and client workstation are not at compatible release levels. Recommend to the customer that the downlevel version be upgraded.

Does the customer want the HAFM application upgraded?

YES NO

↓

Power off the client workstation.

7

Upgrade the downlevel HAFM application (" Install or Upgrade Software " on page 3-51).

Did the software upgrade solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The HAFM server appears operational

Contact the next level of support.

8

Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message Product

Manager error 5001 or Product Manager error 5002?

NO

↓

YES

A product manager application error occurred. Click OK to close the dialog box and close the HAFM and product manager applications. Go to

step 3

.

9

Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message Send

firmware failed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 11 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

10

An attempt to download a firmware version from the HAFM server hard drive to the

switch failed. Retry the operation (" Manage Firmware Versions " on page 3-40).

Did the firmware version download to the switch?

NO

↓

YES

The HAFM server appears operational.

A CTP card failure is suspected. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate

the problem.

11

Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message The data

collection process failed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 13 .

12

The data collection process failed. Retry the process using a new Zip disk(" Collecting

Maintenance Data " on page 3-31).

Did the data collection process complete?

NO

↓

YES

Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support.

13

Did the HAFM server lock up or crash and display a Dr. Watson for Windows dialog box?

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–37

Diagnostics

NO

↓

YES

A Windows operating system or HAFM application error occurred. Click

Cancel to close the dialog box and HAFM application. Go to

step 3

.

14

Did the HAFM server crash and display a blue screen with the system dump file in hexadecimal format (blue screen of death)?

YES NO

↓

The HAFM server appears operational.

15

Attempt to clear the problem by power cycling the HAFM server PC.

a. Power off the PC.

b. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

c. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog

box displays.

d. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server

name (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7), and click Login. The

application opens and the Product View displays.

2–38

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?

NO

↓

YES

The problem is transient and the HAFM server appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication

This MAP describes fault isolation of the Ethernet communication link between a switch and the HAFM server, or between a switch and a web browser PC running the embedded web server interface. Failure indicators include:

• At the Product View, a grey square at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem .

• At the Hardware View, a grey square at the alert panel, a No Link status and reason at the switch Status table, and no FRUs visible for the switch.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–39

Diagnostics

• At the web browser PC, A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server,

HTTP 404 - file not found, or other similar message .

• An event code 433 recorded only in nonvolatile random-access memory

(NV-RAM) on the switch’s CTP card.

• An event code 430, 431, 432, 440 recorded at the switch Event Log or embedded web server event log.

When the logical connection between the switch and HAFM server is initiated, it may take up to five minutes for the link to activate at the Product View, and a green circle to appear at the alert panel and the background to the icon representing the switch. This delay is normal.

CAUTION: Prior to servicing a switch or HAFM server, determine the Ethernet LAN configuration. Installation of switches and the HAFM server on a public customer intranet can complicate problem determination and fault isolation.

1

Was an event code 430, 431, 432, or 440 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 5

.

2

A transmission control protocol (TCP) reset command from the HAFM server caused the Ethernet connection to terminate. The connection recovers if the HAFM server is powered on and the HAFM Services application is running.

Verify the HAFM server is powered on and the HAFM application is running. The application runs in the background as a Windows service and starts automatically when the HAFM server is powered on.

2–40

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Click HAFM Services at the Windows task bar. The HAFM Services window displays.

Is the HAFM server powered on and the HAFM application running?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 4

.

3

Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

4

Reboot the HAFM server PC.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears.

c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click

Yes to power off the PC.

d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–41

Diagnostics e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog

box displays.

f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server

name (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7), and click Login. The

application opens and the Product View displays.

2–42

Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

5

Is fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?

YES NO

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

↓

Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server interface. Go to

step 25 .

6

At the Product View, does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?

YES NO

↓

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch because:

• The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.

• AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.

• The switch CTP card failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch.

Continue.

7

Inspect the switch reporting the problem for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for an ac power distribution or CTP card failure is not described in

this MAP. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the second time

at this step, contact the next level of support.

8

The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed. Click the icon with the grey square representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View displays. At the

Hardware View:

• A grey square appears at the alert panel.

• No FRUs are visible for the switch.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–43

Diagnostics

• The switch Status table is yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and the

Reason field displays an error message.

The following table lists the error messages and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Error Message

Never connected.

Link timeout.

Protocol mismatch.

Duplicate session.

Unknown network address.

Incorrect product type.

Action

Go to

step 9

.

Go to

step 9

.

Go to

step 15 .

Go to

step 18 .

Go to

step 21 .

Go to

step 23 .

9

Errors for the switch Ethernet adapter exceeded a threshold, the switch-to-HAFM server link was not connected, or the switch-to-HAFM server link timed out. A problem with the Ethernet cable, hub or hubs, or other LAN-attached device is indicated.

Verify the switch is connected to the HAFM server through one or more Ethernet hubs.

a. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the switch front panel to an Ethernet hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.

b. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the HAFM server adapter card to an

Ethernet hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.

c. Ensure both Ethernet cables are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cables.

Was a corrective action performed?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 1

.

10

Does the LAN configuration use multiple Ethernet hubs that are daisy-chained?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 12 .

11

Verify the hubs are correctly interconnected.

2–44

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Was a corrective action performed?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 1

.

12

Verify operation of the Ethernet hub or hubs. Inspect each hub for indications of being powered on, such as:

• Green Power LED illuminated.

• Green Status LEDs illuminated.

Is a hub failure indicated?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 14 .

13

Replace the Ethernet hub. Refer to the supporting documentation shipped with the hub for instructions.

Did hub replacement solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

A switch Ethernet port failure is indicated. Go to

step 29 .

14

A problem with another LAN-attached device is indicated.

•

If the problem is associated with another switch or HAFM server, go to " MAP

0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the problem for that device.

• If the problem is associated with an unrelated device, notify the customer and have the system administrator correct the problem.

Did repair of an unrelated LAN-attached device solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

A switch Ethernet port failure is indicated. Go to

step 29 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–45

Diagnostics

15

The HAFM application (running on the HAFM server) and the firmware running on the switch are not at compatible release levels. Recommend to the customer that the downlevel version (software or firmware) be upgraded.

Does the HAFM application require upgrade?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 17 .

16

At the HAFM server, upgrade the HAFM application (" Install or Upgrade Software " on page 3-51).

Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

17

A switch firmware upgrade is required.

Download the firmware (" Download a Firmware Version to a Switch " on page 3-45). After

the download, perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett

Packard for analysis.

Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

18

An instance of the HAFM application is open at another HAFM server and communicating with the switch. Notify the customer and either:

• Power off the HAFM server running the second instance of the application, or

• Configure the HAFM server running the second instance of the application as a client workstation.

Does the customer want the second HAFM server configured as a client?

2–46

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

YES NO

↓

Power off the HAFM server reporting the Duplicate Session communication problem.

19

Determine the internet protocol (IP) address of the HAFM server running the first instance of the HAFM application.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Settings. From the menu that displays, select Control Panel. The Control Panel window displays.

c. At the Control Panel window, double-click the Network icon. The Network dialog box displays with the Identification page open.

d. Click the Protocols tab. The Protocols page opens.

e. Select (highlight) the TCP/IP Protocol entry from the list box and click Properties.

The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog box displays with the IP Address page open (as shown in the following figure).

f. Record the IP address, then click OK to close the dialog box. g. At the Network dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–47

Diagnostics h. Close the Control Panel window.

2–48

Continue.

20

Configure the HAFM server reporting the Duplicate Session communication problem as a client.

a. At the Product View, select Logout from the Logout/Exit menu on the navigation control panel. The HAFM Login dialog box displays.

b. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name and password (obtained in

" MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 3-7).

c. Type the IP address of the HAFM server running the first instance of the HAFM application in the HAFM server field.

d. Click Login. The HAFM application opens as a client and the Product View displays.

Did the HAFM server reconfigure as a client and did the Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and the second HAFM server appears operational as a client.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Contact the next level of support.

21

The IP address defining the switch to the HAFM application is incorrect or unknown and must be verified. A maintenance terminal (desktop or notebook PC) and asynchronous RS-232 modem cable are required to verify the switch IP address. Both tools are provided by installation or service personnel. To verify the switch IP address: a. Remove the protective cap from the 9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the switch (a flat-tip screwdriver may be required). Connect one end of the RS-232 modem cable to the port.

b. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin communication port (COM1 or COM2) at the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.

c. Power on the maintenance terminal. After the PC powers on, the Windows desktop displays.

d. At the Windows desktop, click the Windows Start button. The Windows

Workstation menu displays.

NOTE: The following steps describe inspecting the IP address using HyperTerminal serial communication software.

e. At the Windows Workstation menu, sequentially select Programs, Accessories, and HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–49

Diagnostics f. Type Edge-16 in the Name field and click OK. The Connect To dialog box displays.

g. Ensure the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2 (depending on the serial communication port connection to the switch) and click OK. The COMn dialog box displays (where n is 1 or 2).

2–50 h. Configure the Port Settings parameters as follows:

— Bits per second - 57600.

— Data bits - 8.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

— Parity - None.

— Stop bits - 1.

— Flow control - Hardware.

When the parameters are set, click OK. The HyperTerminal window displays.

i.

At the > prompt, type the user-level password (the default is password) and press

Enter. The password is case sensitive. The HyperTerminal window displays with software and hardware version information for the switch, and an C> prompt at the bottom of the window.

j.

At the C> prompt, type the ipconfig command and press Enter. The

HyperTerminal window displays with configuration information listed (including the IP address).

k. Record the switch IP address.

l.

Select Exit from the File pull-down menu to close the HyperTerminal application.

The following message box appears:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–51

Diagnostics m. Click Yes. The following message box appears: n. Click No to exit and close the HyperTerminal application.

o. Power off the maintenance terminal.

p. Disconnect the RS-232 modem cable from the switch and the maintenance terminal. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.

Continue.

22

Define the switch’s correct IP address to the HAFM server.

a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the switch reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.

b. Select Modify. The Modify Network Address dialog box displays.

2–52 c. Type the correct IP address and click OK.

Did the IP address below the switch icon change to the new entry and did the Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

23

An incorrect product type is defined to the HAFM server a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the product reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics b. Select Delete. A Warning dialog box displays asking if the product is to be deleted.

c. Click Yes to delete the product.

d. At the Product View, select New Product from the Configure menu on the navigation control panel. The New Product dialog box displays.

e. Type the configured IP address in the Network Address field.

f. Select Edge-16 from the Product Type list box and click OK.

Did the IP address below the switch icon change to the new entry and did the Ethernet connection recover?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.

24

The product at the configured IP address is not a Hewlett Packard managed product.

Notify the customer of the problem.

a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the product reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.

b. Select Delete. A Warning dialog box displays asking if the product is to be deleted.

c. Click Yes to delete the product.

Exit MAP.

25

Does the embedded web server application appear operational?

NO

↓

YES

The switch-to-web server PC connection is restored and appears operational.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–53

Diagnostics

2–54

26

A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found, or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC cannot communicate with the switch because:

• The switch-to-PC Internet (Ethernet) link could not be established.

• AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.

• The switch CTP card failed.

Continue.

27

Inspect the switch reporting the problem for indications of being powered on, such as:

• At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.

• Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.

• Audio emanations and airflow from fans.

Does the switch appear powered on?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for an AC power distribution or CTP card failure is not described in

this MAP. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the second time

at this step, contact the next level of support.

28

Either a switch-to-PC Internet link problem (Internet too busy or IP address typed incorrectly) or a switch Ethernet port failure is indicated.

a. Wait approximately five minutes, then attempt to login to the switch again.

b. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch

(obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7). The Username and Password

Required dialog box appears.

c. Type the user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page

2-7) and click OK. If the View panel does not display, wait another five minutes

and perform this step again.

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the View panel displayed?

NO YES

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

↓

The switch-to-web server PC connection is restored and appears operational.

29

An unrecoverable Ethernet fault (reported as event code 433) is indicated. The event code is not reported to the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log, and must be verified through the switch maintenance port. A maintenance terminal

(desktop or notebook PC) and asynchronous RS-232 modem cable are required to verify the reporting of event code 433. Both tools are provided by installation or service personnel. To verify the event code: a. Remove the protective cap from the 9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the switch (a flat-tip screwdriver may be required). Connect one end of the RS-232 modem cable to the port.

b. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin communication port (COM1 or COM2) at the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.

c. Power on the maintenance terminal. After the PC powers on, the Windows desktop displays.

d. At the Windows desktop, click the Windows Start button. The Windows

Workstation menu displays.

NOTE: The following steps describe inspecting event code 433 using HyperTerminal serial communication software.

e. At the Windows Workstation menu, sequentially select Programs, Accessories, and HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–55

Diagnostics f. Type Edge-16 in the Name field and click OK. The Connect To dialog box displays.

g. Ensure the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2 (depending on the serial communication port connection to the switch), and click OK. The COMn dialog box displays (where n is 1 or 2).

2–56 h. Configure the Port Settings parameters as follows:

— Bits per second - 57600.

— Data bits - 8.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

— Parity - None.

— Stop bits - 1.

— Flow control - Hardware.

When the parameters are set, click OK. The HyperTerminal window displays.

i.

At the C> prompt, type the user-level password (the default is password) and press Enter. The password is case sensitive. The HyperTerminal window displays with software and hardware version information for the switch, and a C> prompt at the bottom of the window.

j.

At the C> prompt, type the displaylog command and press Enter. The

HyperTerminal window displays with the event log (from switch NV-RAM) listed.

k. If listed in the REAS column, record the event code 433.

l.

Select Exit from the File pull-down menu to close the HyperTerminal application.

The following message box appears:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–57

Diagnostics m. Click Yes. The following message box appears: n. Click No to exit and close the HyperTerminal application.

o. Power off the maintenance terminal.

p. Disconnect the RS-232 modem cable from the switch and the maintenance terminal. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.

Was event code 433 reported?

NO

↓

YES

An unrecoverable Ethernet fault (CTP card failure) occurred. Because the

CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch.

Contact the next level of support.

MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for the CTP card (which is not a FRU) and fan

FRUs. Failure indicators include:

• The amber LED on a fan illuminates.

•

The amber emulated LED on a fan graphic at the Hardware View illuminates.

• A blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appears at the Product

View or Hardware View.

• An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log.

• A Failed or Not Installed message associated with a fan at the embedded web server interface.

2–58

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

1

Was an event code 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307; or 604, 605, 607; or 800,

801, 802, 805, 806, 807, 810, 811, 812, or 850 observed at the switch Event Log

(HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 3

.

2

The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Event

Code

300

301

302

303

304

305

604

605

607

800

801

802

805

806

Explanation

First cooling fan failed.

Second cooling fan failed.

Third cooling fan failed.

Fourth cooling fan failed.

Fifth cooling fan failed (does not apply to edge switch 2/16).

Sixth cooling fan failed (does not apply to edge switch 2/16).

SBAR failure.

SBAR revision not supported.

Switch contains no operational SBAR assemblies.

High-temperature warning (port module sensor)

Critically hot temperature warning (port module thermal sensor)

Port module shutdown due to thermal violations.

High-temperature warning (SBAR module thermal sensor).

Critically hot temperature warning

(SBAR assembly thermal sensor).

Action

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 14

.

Go to

step 12

.

Go to

step 14

.

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–59

Diagnostics

Event

Code

807

810

811

812

850

Explanation

SBAR assembly shutdown due to thermal violation.

High temperature warning (CTP card thermal sensor).

Critically hot temperature warning

(CTP card thermal sensor).

CTP card shutdown due to thermal violation.

System shutdown due to CTP card thermal violations.

Action

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

Go to

step 8 .

3

Is remote fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?

YES NO

↓

Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server interface. Go to

step 6 .

4

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a fan

(cooling fan assembly) graphic at the Hardware View?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 8

.

5

Does inspection of a fan indicate a failure? Indicators include:

• The amber LED at the upper left corner of a fan illuminates.

• The fan is not rotating.

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 8

.

The switch appears operational.

2–60

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

6

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not

described in this MAP. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the

second time at this step, contact the next level of support.

7

Inspect the fan operational states at the embedded web server interface.

a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel

(Component Properties tab) displays.

b. Inspect the State fields for Fan 0 through Fan 3.

Does the State field display a Failed message for any fan?

YES NO

↓

The switch appears operational.

8

A fan failed or is improperly installed.

a. Partially remove a fan from the chassis.

b. Reseat the fan in the chassis.

Does the fan appear to function?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

9

A fan failed and must be removed and replaced (" RRP: Cooling Fan " on page 4-6.

Does the fan appear to function?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–61

Diagnostics

2–62

10

Have the customer inspect and verify that facility power is within specifications. These specifications are:

• One single-phase connection for each power supply.

• Input power between 120 and 230 Vac.

• Input current between 2 and 4 amps.

• Input frequency between 47 and 63 Hz.

Is facility power within specifications?

YES NO

↓

Ask the customer to correct the facility power problem. When facility power is corrected, verify switch temperature cools to within the operational limit.

11

Inspect the fans. Do one or more fans appear to rotate at insufficient angular velocity

(failure pending)?

NO

↓

YES

Remove and replace the affected fan (" RRP: Cooling Fan " on page 4-6 or.

After fan replacement, verify switch temperature cools to within the operational limit.

A power supply problem is indicated. Go to " MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis " on page 2-26.

12

An SBAR module is not recognized by switch firmware because the firmware version is not supported or the SBAR module failed. Advise the customer of the problem and determine the correct firmware version to download from the HAFM server.

Download the firmware (" Download a Firmware Version to a Switch " on page 3-45).

Perform the data collection procedure after the download.

Continue.

13

Did the firmware download solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

14

The SBAR on the CTP card failed. Because the SBAR is not a FRU, SBAR failure requires replacing the switch.

Contact the next level of support.

MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis

This MAP describes fault isolation for small form factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers and Fibre Channel link incidents. Failure indicators include:

• The amber LED adjacent to a Fibre Channel port illuminates.

• The amber emulated LED adjacent to a port graphic at the Hardware View illuminates.

• A blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) or yellow triangle

(attention indicator) appears at the Product View or Hardware View.

• An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log.

• A port failure message at the Port Properties dialog box or embedded web server interface.

• A link incident message at the Link Incident Log or Port Properties.

1

Was an event code 080, 440, 504, 506, 507, 508, 512, 514, or 604 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 3

.

2

Was an event code 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, or 586 observed at the console of an OSI or FICON server attached to the switch reporting the problem.?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 4

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–63

Diagnostics

514

581

582

583

584

506

507

508

512

3

The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Event

Code

080

440

504

585

586

604

Explanation

Unauthorized world wide name

Embedded port hardware failure.

Port module failure - error threshold exceeded.

Action

Go to

Go to

Go to

step 21

step 11 step 11

Fibre Channel port failure.

Loopback diagnostics port failure.

Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.

SFP nonfatal error.

Go to step 11

.

Go to step 12 .

Go to step 12 .

Go to step 11

.

SFP failure.

Implicit incident.

Go to step 11

.

Go to step 32 .

Bit-error threshold exceeded.

Go to step 34 .

Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Go to step 32 .

Go to

step 32 .

Not operational primitive sequence

(NOS) received.

Primitive sequence timeout

Go to step 33

Go to

step 33 .

.

Invalid primitive sequence received for link state.

SBAR module failure.

Go to step 32 .

.

.

4

Is fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?

YES NO

↓

Fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server interface. Go to

step 35 .

5

Is the amber LED adjacent to a Fibre Channel port illuminated, but not blinking?

2–64

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 11 .

6

Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a port graphic at the Hardware View?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 11 .

7

Did a Fibre Channel port fail a loopback test?

NO

↓

YES

Go to

step 12 .

8

Perform link incident or failure analysis for the port.

Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) overlay the port graphic at the Hardware

View?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 10 .

9

Inspect the port state and LED (green and amber) status.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–65

Diagnostics a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic. The Port Properties dialog box displays.

2–66 b. Inspect the Operational State field and the emulated green and amber LEDs adjacent to the port at the Hardware View.

c. The following table lists LED and port operational state combinations, and associated MAP 0600 (or other) steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Operational

State

Port Failure

Offline

Not

Operational

No Light

Testing

Testing

Beaconing

Off

Off

Green

LED

Off

Off

Off

On

Off or On

On

Off

Amber

LED

Off

Off

Blinking

Blinking

Blinking

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

Action

step 11

step 14 step 14 step 14 .

.

.

.

Internal loopback test in process.

External loopback test in process.

Go to

step 15 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Operational

State

Inactive

Green

LED

Off

Not Installed Off

Amber

LED

Off

Off

Off

Action

See Reason Field of Port Properties dialog box.

The port optics are not installed or the feature that provides additional port function is not enabled.

Go to

step 16

Invalid attachment

On

Link Reset On

Link Incident Off

Segmented On

Off

Off

Off

Go to

step 24

Go to

step 25 .

.

Go to

MAP 0700 .

10

A link incident may have occurred, but the LIN alerts option is not enabled for the port and the attention indicator does not appear.

At the Hardware View, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel. The Link Incident Log displays. If a link incident occurred, the affected port number is listed with one of the following messages.

Implicit incident.

Bit-error threshold exceeded.

Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.

NO

↓

Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.

Did one of the listed messages appear in the Link Incident Log?

YES

Go to

step 25 .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–67

Diagnostics

11

A Fibre Channel port SFP failed and must be removed and replaced.

a. Determine the type of SFP to be removed and replaced. This procedure is

concurrent and can be performed while switch power is on ( RRP: SFP

Transceiver on page 4-2).

b. Perform an external loopback test on the port SFP as part of FRU removal and replacement.

c. Perform the data collection procedure as part of FRU removal and replacement.

Did port SFP replacement solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

Contact the next level of support.

12

A Fibre Channel port SFP failed an internal or external loopback test.

a. Reset the failed port.

1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port. A pop-up menu appears.

2. Select Reset Port. A Reset Port n message box displays, where n is the port number (0 through 15).

2–68

3. Click OK. The port resets.

b. Perform an external loopback test for the port SFP.

Did resetting the port solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

13

The port SFP may be improperly seated in the chassis. Partially remove and reseat the SFP, then perform an external loopback test for the SFP.

Did reseating the port SFP solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational.

Go to

step 11 .

14

The fabric is initializing or a problem with the port-attached device is indicated as described by one of the following operational state messages:

• Offline - the port is blocked and transmitting the offline sequence (OLS) to the attached switch, or the port is unblocked and receiving the OLS, indicating the attached switch is set offline.

• Not Operational - the port is receiving the Fibre Channel not operational sequence (NOS), indicating the attached switch failed.

• No light (any port) - no signal (light) is received by the port. This is a normal condition when there is no cable attached to the port SFP or when the attached switch or fabric device is powered off.

Inform the customer an attached switch or fabric device is powered off, set offline, or failed.

15

Beaconing is enabled for the port.

a. Consult with the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port beaconing is enabled.

b. Disable port beaconing:

1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.

2. Click Enable Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box adjacent to the option, and port beaconing is disabled.

Was port beaconing enabled because port failure or degradation was suspected?

YES NO

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–69

Diagnostics

↓

The switch appears operational.

Go to

step 4

.

16

The port has an invalid attachment. The information in the Port Properties dialog box specifies the reason as listed in the following table.

Reason

Unknown

Action

Contact the next level of support.

Go to step 17 .

ISL connection not allowed on this port.

Incompatible switch at other end of ISL.

External loopback adapter connected to the port.

N-Port connection not allowed on this port.

Non-Hewlett Packard switch at other end of the ISL.

Port binding violation -

Unauthorized WWN.

Unresponsive node connected to port.

Go to step 18 .

Go to step 19 .

Go to step 17 .

Go to step 18 .

Go to step 21 .

Go to step 22 .

17

The port connection conflicts with the configured port type. Either an expansion port (E_Port) is incorrectly cabled to a Fibre Channel device or a fabric port (F_Port) is incorrectly cabled to a fabric element (director or switch).

a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, click the Configure icon at the navigation control panel and select Ports from the Configure menu. The Configure Ports dialog box (open systems mode) displays.

2–70

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics b. Use the vertical scroll bar as necessary to display the information row for the port indicating an invalid attachment.

c. Select (click) the Type field and configure the port from the list box as follows:

• Select fabric port (F_Port) if the port is cabled to a device (node).

• Select expansion port (E_Port) if the port is cabled to a fabric element

(director or switch) to form an ISL.

d. Click the Activate button to save the configuration information and close the dialog box.

Did reconfiguring the port type solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

18

The switch is configured for Open Fabric mode and the switch at the other end of the

ISL is a Hewlett Packard director or switch configured for Homogeneous mode. Or the switch is connected to a non-Hewlett Packard switch and interop mode is set to

Homogeneous fabric mode.

Configure the switch operating mode:

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–71

Diagnostics

a. Ensure the switch is set offline. For instructions, refer to " Set Offline State " on page 3-38 and return here.

b. At the Hardware View for the selected switch, click the Configure icon at the navigation control panel and select Operating Mode from the Configure menu.

The Configure Operating Mode dialog box displays.

2–72 c. Select the operating mode as follows:

— Select the Open Systems radio button to set the switch to open systems operating mode, then select Homogeneous Fabric or Open Fabric 1.0 from the

Interop Mode list box.

Select the homogeneous fabric option if the switch is fabric-attached only to other Hewlett Packard switches that are also operating in Homogeneous

Fabric mode. Select the open fabric option if the fabric contains Hewlett

Packard switches and other open-fabric compliant switches.

d. Click the Activate button to save the selection and close the dialog box.

Did configuring the operating mode solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

19

A loopback (wrap) plug is connected to the port and there is no diagnostic test running. Is a loopback plug in the port receptacle?

YES NO

↓

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

20

Remove the loopback plug from the port receptacle. If directed by the customer, connect a fiber-optic jumper cable attaching a device to the switch.

• If the port is operational and a device is not attached, both LEDs adjacent to the port extinguish and the port state is No Light.

• If the port is operational and a device is attached, the green

LED illuminates, the amber LED extinguishes, and the port state is Online.

Did removing the loopback plug solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

21

The WWN entered to configure port binding for this port is not valid or a nickname was used that was not configured for the attached device in the product manager.

Open the Node List View from the Hardware View, and select Node List from the View menu on the navigation control panel. Note the Port WWN column.

T he Port WWN is the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the port or Fibre Channel interface installed on the attached device.

— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the device manufacturer’s name.

— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the

WWN.

The Bound WWN must be in the form of the raw WWN format

(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) or must be a valid nickname.

Did configuring the WWN or nickname solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–73

Diagnostics

2–74

22

Clean the fiber-optic connectors on the cable.

a. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached device offline.

b. Block the port. Refer to " Block a Port " on page 3-39 for instructions.

c. Disconnect both ends of the fiber-optic cable.

d. Clean the fiber-optic connectors. Refer to " Clean Fiber-Optic Components " on page

3-33 for instructions.

e. Reconnect the fiber-optic cable.

f. Unblock the port. Refer to " Unblock a Port " on page 3-39 for instructions.

g. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.

Exit MAP.

23

Inspect and service the host bus adapters (HBAs), as necessary.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Did service of the HBAs solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

Exit MAP.

Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.

24

The switch and attached fabric device are performing a Fibre Channel link reset. This is a transient state. Wait approximately 30 seconds and inspect port state and LED behavior.

Did the link recover and resume operation?

NO

↓

YES

The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.

Go to

step 4

.

25

A link incident message appeared in the Link Incident Log or in the Link Incident field the Port Properties dialog box.

Clear the link incident for the port.

a. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.

b. Select Clear Link Incident Alert(s). The Clear Link Incident Alert(s) dialog box displays.

c. Select the This port (n) only radio button (where n is the port number) and click

OK. The link incident clears.

d. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–75

Diagnostics

↓

The problem is transient. The Fibre Channel link and the switch appear operational.

26

Inspect the fiber-optic jumper cable attached to the port and ensure the cable is not bent and connectors are not damaged. If the cable is bent or connectors are damaged: a. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer system administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached switch or device offline.

b. Block the port (" Block a Port " on page 3-39).

c. Remove and replace the fiber-optic jumper cable.

d. Unblock the port (" Unblock a Port " on page 3-39).

Was a corrective action performed?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 28 .

27

Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.

28

Clean fiber-optic connectors on the jumper cable.

a. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached switch or device offline.

b. Block the port (" Block a Port " on page 3-39).

c. Disconnect both ends of the fiber-optic jumper cable.

d. Clean the fiber-optic connectors (" Clean Fiber-Optic Components " on page 3-33)

e. Reconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable.

f. Unblock the port (" Unblock a Port " on page 3-39).

2–76

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics g. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.

29

Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port and connect the cable to a spare port.

Is a link incident reported at the new port?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 31 .

30

The attached device is causing the recurrent link incident. Notify the customer of the problem and have the system administrator: a. Inspect and verify operation of the attached device.

b. Repair the attached device if a failure is indicated.

c. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.

Did the link incident recur?

YES NO

↓

The attached device, Fibre Channel link, and switch appear operational.

Contact the next level of support

31

The switch port reporting the problem is causing the recurrent link incident. The recurring link incident indicates port degradation and a possible pending failure. Go to

step 11

.

32

An implicit incident error (event code 581), loss of signal or loss of synchronization

(event code 583), not operational primitive sequence (NOS) received (event code

584), or SBAR module failure (event code 604) caused the switch to fault.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for analysis.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–77

Diagnostics

33

The switch primitive sequence timed out (event code 585) or an invalid primitive sequence was received for link state (event code 586). Either error causes the switch to automatically reinitialize the fabric. Attached devices may momentarily logout, login, and resume operation.

If the problem persists, an attached device may be marginally operating and causing the error condition. Inform the customer of the problem.

34

A port was bypassed because a bit-error threshold was exceeded (event code 582).

If the problem persists, the attached device may be marginally operating and causing the error condition. Inform the customer of the problem.

35

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not

described in this MAP. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the

second time at this step, contact the next level of support.

36

Inspect port operational states at the embedded web server interface.

a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties tab) displays.

b. Inspect the Operational State field.

c. At the View panel (Port Properties tab) click the first port (1).

d. Inspect the Operational State field.

e. At the View panel (Port Properties tab) sequentially click the remaining ports.

Inspect the Operational State field for each port.

Does the Operational State field display a Segmented message for a port?

NO

↓

YES

Port segmentation is indicated. Go to " MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented

Port Problem Determination " on page 2-79.

2–78

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

37

Does the Operational State field display a Port Failure message for any port?

NO

↓

YES

A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to

The switch appears operational.

step 11

.

MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port Problem

Determination

This MAP describes isolation of fabric logout, interswitch link (ISL), and port segmentation problems. Failure indicators include:

• An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log.

• A segmentation reason associated with the port at the embedded web server interface.

• A yellow triangle (attention indicator) appears at the Product View or Hardware

View.

• A link incident message recorded in the Link Incident Log or Port Properties dialog box.

1

Was an event code 011, 021, 051, 052, 061, 062, 070, 071, or 072, observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 3

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–79

Diagnostics

2

The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Event

Code

011

021

051

052

061

062

070

071

072

Explanation

Login server database invalid.

Name server database invalid.

Management server database invalid.

Management server internal error.

Fabric controller database invalid.

Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.

E_Port is segmented.

Switch is isolated.

E_Port connected to an unsupported switch.

Action

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 7

.

Go to step 8

.

Go to step 9

.

Go to step 9

.

Go to

step 10 .

3

Is fault isolation being performed at the HAFM server?

YES NO

↓

Fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server interface. Go to

step 17 .

4

Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) appear to overlay the port graphic at the

Hardware View?

YES NO

↓

The problem is transient and the switch-to-fabric device connection appears operational.

5

Inspect the port state and LED status for the port.

2–80

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic. The Port Properties dialog box displays.

b. Inspect the Operational State field.

Does the Operational State field indicate Segmented E_Port?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for a port failure or other link incident is not described in this MAP. Go

to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis " on page 2-63.

6

Inspect the Reason field at the Port Properties dialog box. The following table lists port segmentation reasons and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Segmentation Reason

Incompatible operating parameters.

Duplicate domain IDs.

Incompatible zoning configurations.

Build fabric protocol error.

No principal switch.

No response from attached switch.

Action

Go to

step 11 .

Go to step 12

.

Go to step 13

.

Go to step 14

.

Go to step 19

.

Go to step 16

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–81

Diagnostics

7

As indicated by an event code 052, a minor internal operating error was detected by the management server subsystem. The error caused management server databases to be re-initialized to an empty state. As a result, a disruptive server logout and login occurred for all attached devices. All attached devices resume operation after management server login.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for analysis.

8

As indicated by an event code 062, the fabric controller software detected a path within the connected multi-switch fabric that traverses more than seven interswitch links (ISLs or hops). Fibre Channel frames may persist in the fabric longer than timeout values allow.

Advise the customer of the problem and work with the system administrator to reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two fabric switches does not traverse more than seven hops.

Did fabric reconfiguration solve the problem?

NO

↓

YES

The switch and connected multi-switch fabric appear operational.

Contact the next level of support.

9

A 070 event code indicates the E_Port detected an incompatibility with an attached switch and prevented the switches from forming a multi-switch fabric. A segmented

E_port cannot transmit Class 2 or Class 3 Fibre Channel traffic.

A 071 event code indicates the switch is isolated from all switches in a multi-switch fabric, and is accompanied by a 070 event code for the segmented E_Port. The 071 event code is resolved when all 070 events are corrected.

Obtain supplementary event data for the 070 event code.

a. At the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log, record the first four bytes (0 through 3) of event data.

b. Examine the first five bytes (0 through 4) of event data.

2–82

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics c. Byte 0 specifies the port number (00 through 15) of the segmented E_port. Byte

4 specifies the segmentation reason as listed in the following table.

Byte

3

01

02

03

04

05

06

Segmentation Reason

Incompatible operating parameters.

Duplicate domain IDs.

Incompatible zoning configurations.

Build fabric protocol error.

No principal switch.

No response from attached switch (Hello Timeout).

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

Go to

Action

step 11

step 12

step 13

step 14

step 19

step 16

.

.

.

.

.

.

10

As indicated by an event code 072, the switch E_Port is connected to an unsupported switch.

Advise the customer of the problem and disconnect the interswitch link to the unsupported switch.

11

The switch E_Port segmented because the error detect time-out value (E_D_TOV) or resource allocation time-out value (R_A_TOV) is incompatible with the attached fabric element.

a. Contact Hewlett Packard customer support or engineering personnel to determine the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values for the switches.

b. Notify the customer that both switches will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switches and sets attached devices offline.

c. Set both switches offline (" Set Offline State " on page 3-38).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–83

Diagnostics d. At the Hardware View for the switch, select Operating Parameters from the

Configure menu on the navigation control panel. The Configure Operating

Parameters dialog box displays.

2–84 e. Type the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values, then click Activate.

f. Repeat steps d and e at the Hardware View for the switch attached to the segmented switch. Use the same E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values.

g. Set both switches online (" Set Online State " on page 3-37).

Did the operating parameter change solve the problem and did both switches join through the ISL to form a fabric?

NO

↓

YES

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

Contact the next level of support.

12

The switch E_Port segmented because two fabric elements have duplicate domain

IDs.

a. Work with the system administrator to determine the desired domain ID (1 through 31 inclusive) for both switches.

b. Notify the customer that both switches will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switches and sets attached devices offline.

c. Set both switches offline (" Set Offline State " on page 3-38).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics d. At the Hardware View for the switch, select Operating Parameters from the

Configure menu on the navigation control panel. The Configure Operating

Parameters dialog box displays.

e. Type the customer-determined preferred domain ID value, then click Activate.

f. Repeat steps d and e at the Hardware View for the switch attached to the segmented E-Port (second switch). Use a different preferred domain ID value.

g. Set both switches online (" Set Online State " on page 3-37).

Did the domain ID change solve the problem and did both switches join through the

ISL to form a fabric?

NO

↓

YES

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

Contact the next level of support.

13

The switch E_Port segmented because two switches have incompatible zoning configurations. An identical zone name is recognized in the active zone set for both switches, but the zones contain different members.

a. Work with the system administrator to determine the desired zone name change for the one of the affected switches.Zone names must conform to the following rules:

• The name must be 64 characters or fewer in length.

• The first character must be a letter (a through z), upper or lower case.

• Other characters are alphanumeric (a through z or 0 through 9), dollar sign

($), hyphen (-), caret (^), or underscore (_).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–85

Diagnostics b. Close the product manager application for the switch (Hardware View). The main

HAFM window, or Product View (still active) displays.

c. Select the Fabrics tab from the View menu. The Fabrics View displays with the default Topology tab active.

d. Select the Zone Set tab at the bottom of the window. The Zone Set tab becomes active and displays the active zone set.

2–86 e. Inspect zone names in the active zone set to determine the incompatible name.

f. Modify the incompatible zone name as directed by the customer:

1. At the navigation control panel, select Zone Sets from the Configure menu.

The Zone Sets dialog box displays.

2. Select (highlight) the active zone set name, then select Modify from the

Actions icon on the dialog box. The Modify Zone Set dialog box displays.

3. Select (highlight) the zone name to be modified (and later deleted) at the

Zone Library list, then select Copy Zone from the Actions icon on the dialog box. The Copy Zone dialog box displays.

4. Type the new zone name (specified by the customer) and click OK. The new zone name appears in the Zone Library list. The new zone contains the same members as the copied zone.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

5. Select (highlight) the new zone name and drag (holding the left mouse button) the name to the Zones in Set list.

6. At the Zones in Set list, select (highlight) the zone name to be deleted, then drag (holding the left mouse button) the name off the Modify Zone Set dialog box.

7. At the Modify Zone Set dialog box, click Save Zone Set. The zone set (with the new zone name) is saved and the dialog box closes.

8. At the Zone Sets dialog box, select (highlight) the active zone set name, then select Activate from the Actions icon on the dialog box. The Activate Zone Set dialog box displays.

9. Click Start. The status message changes to Activate zone set complete. Click

Close to close the dialog box.

10.Click Close to close the Zone Sets dialog box and return to the Zoning Set tab view with the modified active zone set.

Did the zone name change solve the problem and did both switches join through the

ISL to form a fabric?

NO

↓

YES

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

Contact the next level of support.

14

The switch E_Port segmented because a build fabric protocol error was detected.

a. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the segmented E_Port.

b. Reconnect the cable to the same port.

Did reconnecting the cable solve the problem and did both switches join through the

ISL to form a fabric?

NO

↓

YES

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

15

Initial program load (IPL) the switch (

Reset or IPL the Switch on page -35).

Did the IPL solve the problem and did both switches join through the ISL to form a fabric?

NO YES

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–87

Diagnostics

↓

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

Contact the next level of support.

16

The switch E_Port segmented because a response to a verification check indicates the attached switch is not operational.

a. Perform the data collection procedure for the switch and return the Zip disk to

Hewlett Packard for analysis.

b. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 and perform fault isolation for the failed

switch.

17

Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?

YES NO

↓

Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not

described in this MAP. Go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7. If this is the

second time at this step, contact the next level of support.

18

Inspect the Fibre Channel port segmentation reason at the embedded web server interface.

a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties tab) displays.

b. Click the port number (0 through 15) of the segmented port.

c. Inspect the Reason field for the port.

Is the Reason field blank or does it display an N/A message?

NO

↓

YES

The switch ISL appears operational.

The Reason field displays a reason message. The following table lists segmentation reasons and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.

Segmentation Reason

Incompatible operating parameters.

Duplicate domain IDs.

Incompatible zoning configurations.

Action

Go to

step 11 .

Go to step 12

.

Go to step 13

.

2–88

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Segmentation Reason

Build fabric protocol error.

No principal switch.

No response from attached switch.

Action

Go to step 14

.

Go to step 19

.

Go to step 16

.

19

A switch E_Port segmented because no switch in the fabric is capable of becoming the principal switch.

a. Notify the customer that the switch will be set offline. Ensure the system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

b. Set the switch offline (" Set Offline State " on page 3-38)

c. At the Hardware View or Port Card View for the switch, select Operating

Parameters from the Configure icon on the navigation control panel. The

Configure Operating Parameters dialog box displays.

d. At the Switch Priority field, select Principal, Never Principal, or Default (the default setting is Default). Then click Activate.

e. Set the switch online (" Set Online State " on page 3-37)

Did the switch priority change solve the problem and did both switches join through the ISL to form a fabric?

NO

↓

YES

The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–89

Diagnostics

Contact the next level of support.

MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination

This MAP describes isolation of hardware-related problems with the HAFM server platform. Although this MAP provides high-level fault isolation instructions, refer to the documentation provided with the PC for detailed problem determination and resolution.

1

At the HAFM server, close the HAFM application.

a. At the navigation control panel of the Product View, select Exit from the

Logout/Exit icon. The HAFM application closes.

b. Close any other applications that are running.

Continue.

2

Inspect the available random access memory (RAM). The computer must have a minimum of 64 megabytes (MB) of memory to run the Windows operating system and

HAFM application.

a. Right-click anywhere in the Windows task bar at the bottom of the desktop. A pop-up menu appears.

b. Select Task Manager. The Windows Task Manager dialog box displays with the

Performance page open.

c. At the Physical Memory (K) portion of the dialog box, inspect the total amount of physical memory.

2–90

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics d. Close the dialog box by clicking Close at the upper right corner of the window.

Does the computer have sufficient memory?

YES NO

↓

A memory upgrade is required. Inform the customer of the problem and contact the next level of support.

3

Reboot the HAFM server PC and perform system diagnostics.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears.

c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click

Yes to power off the PC.

d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click OK. The Windows desktop displays.

Did POSTs detect a problem?

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–91

Diagnostics

NO

↓

YES

A computer hardware problem exists. Refer to the supporting documentation shipped with the PC for instructions on resolving the problem.

4

After rebooting the PC, the HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog box displays.

2–92

Did the HAFM Login dialog box display?

YES NO

↓

Go to

step 6

.

5

At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server name

(obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7, and all are case sensitive), and click

Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Diagnostics

Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?

NO

↓

YES

The PC appears operational.

6

Perform one of the following:

• If the PC has standalone diagnostic test programs resident on the hard drive, perform the diagnostics. Refer to supporting documentation shipped with the PC for instructions.

• If the PC does not have standalone diagnostic test programs resident on fixed

disk, go to step 7

.

Did diagnostic test programs detect a problem?

NO

↓

YES

Refer to the supporting documentation shipped with the PC for instructions to resolve the problem.

7

Reboot the HAFM server PC.

a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.

b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears.

c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click

Yes to power off the PC.

d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the

Begin Logon dialog box displays.

e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog

box. Type a user name and password (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog

box displays.

f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server

name (obtained in " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7, and all are case

sensitive), and click Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.

Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?

NO YES

edge switch 2/16 service manual

2–93

Diagnostics

↓

The PC appears operational.

8

Re-install the HAFM application (" Install or Upgrade Software " on page 2-51).

Did the HAFM application install and open successfully?

NO

↓

YES

The PC appears operational.

9

Advise the customer and next level of support that the PC hard drive should be formatted. If the customer and support personnel do not concur, go to

step 10

.

a. Format the PC hard drive. Refer to supporting documentation shipped with the

PC for instructions.

b. Install the Windows operating system and HAFM application.

Did the PC hard drive format, and did the operating system and HAFM application install and open successfully?

NO

↓

YES

The PC appears operational.

10

Additional analysis for the failure is not described in this MAP. Contact the next level of support.

2–94

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3

Repair Information

isible Body Tag

This chapter describes the repair and repair-related procedures for the hp

StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16), and associated field-replaceable units (FRUs). These procedures are described:

• Obtaining log information at the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) server.

• Displaying and using HAFM server views.

• Obtaining and interpreting port diagnostic and performance data, and performing port diagnostic loopback tests.

• Swapping ports (S/390 mode only).

• Collecting maintenance data.

• Cleaning fiber-optic components.

• Powering the switch on and off.

• Performing an initial program load (IPL).

• Setting the switch online or offline.

• Blocking or unblocking Fibre Channel ports.

• Managing firmware versions.

• Managing configuration data.

• Installing or upgrading software.

Do not perform repairs until a failure is isolated to a FRU. If fault isolation was not

performed, refer to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–1

Repair Information

Factory Defaults

Table 3–1

lists the defaults for the passwords, and IP, subnet, and gateway addresses.

Table 3–1: Factory-Set Defaults

Item

Customer password

Maintenance password

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway address

Default password level-2

10.1.1.10

255.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Procedural Notes

NOTE: HAFM and product manager screens in this manual may not match the screens on your server and workstation. The title bars have been removed and the fields may contain data that does not match the data seen on your system.

The following procedural notes are referenced in applicable repair procedures. The notes do not necessarily apply to all procedures in the chapter.

1. Before performing a repair procedure, read the procedure carefully and thoroughly to familiarize yourself with the information and reduce the possibility of problems or customer down time.

2. When performing procedures described in this chapter, heed all WARNING and

CAUTION statements, and other statements listed in the preface of this manual.

3. After completing steps of a detailed procedure that is referenced from another procedure, return to the initial (referencing) procedure and continue to the next step of that procedure.

4. After replacing a FRU, extinguish the System Error light-emitting diode (LED) on the front of the switch.

3–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Using Log Information

The HAFM and switch product manager provide access to ten logs that provide information for administration, operation, and maintenance personnel. Each log stores up to 1,000 entries. The most recent entry appears at the top of a log. If a log is full, a new entry overwrites the oldest entry.

Five logs are accessed through the HAFM application:

• HAFM Audit Log.

• HAFM Event Log.

• Session Log.

• Product Status Log.

• Fabric Log

Five logs are accessed through the product manager application:

• Switch Audit Log.

• Switch Event Log.

• Hardware Log.

• Link Incident Log.

• Threshold Alert Log.

HAFM Audit Log

The HAFM Audit Log displays a history of user actions performed through the

HAFM application. This information is useful for system administrators and users. To open the HAFM Audit Log, select Audit Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

For a description of the HAFM Audit Log and an explanation of button functions at the bottom of the log window, refer to the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user

guide (A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).

HAFM Event Log

The HAFM Event Log (

Figure 3–1 ) displays events or error conditions recorded by

the HAFM services application. Entries reflect the status of the application and managed switches.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–3

Repair Information

Information associated with a call-home failure is intended for maintenance personnel to fault isolate the problem (modem failure, no dial tone, etc.), while information provided in all other entries is generally intended for use by third-level support personnel to isolate more significant problems.

To open the HAFM Event Log, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

Figure 3–1: HAFM Event Log

The event log contains the following columns:

• Date/Time - the date and time the event was reported to the HAFM server.

• Event - an event number and brief description of the event. Include both the event number and description when reporting an event to third-level customer support.

• Product - the product associated with the event. Some events are associated with the HAFM services application, while others are associated with a specific instance of the HAFM application. In the latter case, the product and configured name (or internet protocol (IP) address) associated with the instance are displayed.

• Qualifier - this column provides an event qualifier for use by engineering personnel. Include this number when reporting an event to third-level customer support.

• Data - additional event data for fault isolating a problem. Use the information when fault isolating a call-home problem, or include the information when reporting an event to third-level customer support.

Session Log

The Session Log displays a session (login and logout) history for the HAFM server, including the date and time, user name, and network address of each session. This information is useful for system administrators and users. To open the Session Log, select Session Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

3–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

For a description of the Session Log and an explanation of button functions at the bottom of the log window, refer to the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide

(A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).

Product Status Log

The Product Status Log ( Figure 3–2

) records an entry when the status of a switch changes. The log reflects the previous status and current status of the switch, and indicates the instance of a switch product manager application that should be opened to investigate a problem. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.

To open the Product Status Log, select Product Status Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

Figure 3–2: Product Status Log

The log contains the following columns:

• Date/Time - the date and time the switch status change occurred.

• Network Address - the IP address or configured name of the switch. This address or name corresponds to the address or name displayed under the switch icon at the

Product View.

• Previous Status - the status of the switch prior to the reported status change

(Operational, Degraded, Failed, or Unknown). An Unknown status indicates the

HAFM application cannot communicate with the switch.

• New Status - the status of the switch after to the reported status change

(Operational, Degraded, Failed, or Unknown).

Fabric Log

The Fabric Log reflects the time and nature of significant changes in the managed fabric.

To display the Fabric Log, choose Fabric Log from the Logs menu.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–5

Repair Information

• The Date/Time column displays the date and time of the change in the fabric.

• The Fabric Status Changed column displays the type of change in the fabric (for example, a switch was added or removed, an ISL was added or removed, the fabric was renamed or persisted, or a zone set became active).

• The Description column displays a description of the change in the fabric.

Audit Log

The switch Audit Log displays a history of all configuration changes made to a switch from the product manager simple network management protocol (SNMP) management workstation. This information is useful for system administrators and users. To open the Audit Log from the Hardware View, Port List View, or Performance

View, select Audit Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

For a description of the Audit Log and an explanation of button functions at the bottom of the log window, refer to the switch hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16

product manager user guide (A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE).

Event Log

The switch Event Log (

Figure 3–3 ) displays a history of events for the switch, such as

system events, degraded operation, FRU failures, FRU removals and replacements, port problems, Fibre Channel link incidents, and HAFM server-to-switch communication problems. All detected software and hardware failures are recorded in the Event Log. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.

To open the Event Log, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

3–6

Figure 3–3: Switch Event Log

The log contains the following columns:

• Date/Time - the date and time the switch event occurred.

• Event - the three-digit event code associated with the event. Refer to Appendix B for an explanation of event codes.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

• Description - a brief description of the event.

• Severity - the severity of the event (Informational, Minor, Major, or Severe).

• FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:

— SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for

SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.

— PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.

The power supplies are FRUs.

— FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.

— CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is not a FRU.

— THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal sensor is not a FRU.

• Event Data - up to 32 bytes of supplementary event data (if available for the event) in hexadecimal format. Refer to Appendix B for an explanation of the supplementary event data.

Refresh the Event Log

To ensure recently-created events appear in the Event Log, periodically refresh the log display. This is particularly important when inspecting the log for informational event codes to verify a repair procedure. To refresh the log, click Refresh at the bottom of the log window.

Clear the Event Log

To ensure the Event Log is up-to-date and not filled with archived events, periodically clear the log display. To clear the log, click Clear at the bottom of the log window.

Hardware Log

The Hardware Log (

Figure 3–4 ) displays a history of FRU removals and replacements

(insertions) for the switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–7

Repair Information

3–8

Figure 3–4: Hardware Log

To open the Hardware Log, select Hardware Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

The log contains the following columns:

• Date/Time - the date and time the FRU was inserted or removed.

• FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:

— SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for

SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.

— PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.

The power supplies are FRUs.

— FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.

— CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is not a FRU.

— THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal sensor is not a FRU.

• Position - a number representing the FRU chassis position. Chassis slots for power supplies are 0 and 1. Chassis slots for fans are 0 through 5 inclusive.

Chassis slots for SFPs are 0 through 15.

• Action - the action performed (Inserted or Removed).

• Part Number - the part number of the inserted or removed FRU.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

• Serial Number - the serial number of the inserted or removed FRU.

Link Incident Log

The Link Incident Log (

Figure 3–5 ) displays a history of Fibre Channel link incidents

and associated port numbers for the switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems and repair verification.

To open the Link Incident Log, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.

Figure 3–5: Link Incident Log

The log contains the following columns:

• Date/Time - the date and time the link incident occurred.

• Port - the port number that reported the link incident (0 through 15).

• Link Incident - a brief description of the link incident. Problem descriptions include:

— Implicit incident.

— Bit-error threshold exceeded.

— Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

— Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence received.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–9

Repair Information

— Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

— Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.

Refer to " MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis

" on page -63 or " MAP

0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port Problem Determination " on page -79 for

corrective actions in response to these link incident messages.

Refresh the Link Incident Log

To ensure recently-created link incidents appear in the Link Incident Log, periodically refresh the log display. To refresh the log, click Refresh at the bottom of the log window.

Clear the Link Incident Log

To ensure the Link Incident Log is up-to-date and not filled with archived incidents, periodically clear the log display. To clear the log, click Clear at the bottom of the log window.

Threshold Alert Log

This log provides details of threshold alert notifications. Besides the date and time that the alert occurred, the log also displays details about the alert as configured through the Configure Threshold Alert(s) option under the Configure menu.

3–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Figure 3–6: Threshold Alert Log

• Date/Time

Date and time stamp for when the alert occurred.

• Name

Name for the alert as configured through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box.

• Port

Port number where the alert occurred.

• Type

The type of alert: transmit (TX) or receive (RX).

• Utilization %

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–11

Repair Information

Percent usage of traffic capacity. This is the percent of the port’s throughput capacity achieved by the measured throughput. This setting constitutes the threshold value and is configured through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box. For example, a value of 25 means that threshold occurs when throughput reaches 25 percent of the port’s capacity.

• Alert Time

The time that the utilization % must exist before an alert is generated. This is set through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box.

• Interval

The time interval during which the throughput is measured and an alert can generate. This is set through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box.

Using Views

The HAFM and product manager provide access to a series of views (windows) that provide information for administrators, users, and maintenance personnel. These views are accessed through the Hardware View, and include the:

• Port List View.

• FRU List View.

• Node List View.

• Performance View.

• Topology View.

• Zoning View.

Port List View

The Port List View ( Figure 3–7

) lists and provides status information for all switch ports. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems.

3–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

To open the Port List View, select Port List from the View menu on the navigation control panel.

Figure 3–7: Port List View

The port row provides status information in the following columns:

• Port # - the port number (0 through 15).

• Addr - the switch logical port address in hexadecimal format (S/390 operating mode only).

• Name - the port name configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.

• Blocked Config - the status (Blocked or Unblocked) of the port.

• State - the state of the port. Valid states are:

— Online, offline, or testing.

— Beaconing.

— Invalid Attachment.

— Link incident or link reset

— No light, not operational, or port failure.

— Segmented E_Port.

• Type - The type of port. Valid port types are a generic port (G_Port) that is not connected to a Fibre Channel device or switch, therefore light is not transmitted; fabric port (F_Port) that is connected to a device; or an expansion port (E_Port) that is connected to another switch to form an interswitch link (ISL).

• Operating speed - The speed at which the port is operating.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–13

Repair Information

• Alert - If link incident (LIN) alerts are configured for the port through the

Configure Ports dialog box, a yellow triangle appears in the column when a link incident occurs. A yellow triangle also appears if beaconing is enabled for the port. A red and yellow diamond appears if the port fails.

Click anywhere in the port row to open the Port Properties dialog box. Right-click anywhere in the port row to open a menu to:

• Open the Port Properties dialog box.

• Open the Node Properties dialog box.

• Display the Port Technology dialog box.

• Block or unblock the port.

• Enable port beaconing.

• Perform port diagnostics.

• Enable or disable port channel wrapping. This menu option appears only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.

• Swap one Fibre Channel port address with another. This menu option appears only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.

• Clear link incident alerts.

• Reset the port.

• Configure Port Binding.

FRU List View

The FRU List View (

Figure 3–8 on page 3-15 ) displays a list of all switch FRUs. The

information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.

3–14

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Figure 3–8: FRU List View

To open the FRU List View from the Hardware View, click View and select FRU List.

The FRU List View contains the following columns:

• FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:

— SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for

SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.

— PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.

The power supplies are FRUs.

— FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.

— CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is not a FRU.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–15

Repair Information

— THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal sensor is not a FRU.

• Position-a number representing the FRU chassis position. The chassis (slot) position for a nonredundant FRU is 0. The chassis positions for redundant FRUs are 0 and 1.

• Status-the FRU status (Active or Backup).

• Part Number-the FRU part number.

• Serial Number-the FRU serial number.

Node List View

The Node List View (

Figure 3–9 ) displays information about all devices attached to

the switch through node ports (N_Ports). The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.

To open the Node List View, select Node List from the View menu on the navigation control panel.

3–16

Figure 3–9: Node List View

The Node List View contains the following columns:

• Port # - the port number (0 through 15). Only ports attached to a device are displayed.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

• Addr - the switch logical port address (05 through 13 inclusive) in hexadecimal format (S/390 operating mode only).

• Node Type - the type of attached device. This information is supplied by the device (if supported). Node types include:

— Unknown or other.

— Hub, switch, gateway, or converter.

— Host or host bus adapter (HBA).

— Proxy agent.

— Storage device or storage subsystem.

— Module.

— Software driver.

• Port WWN- the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the port or Fibre Channel interface installed on the attached device.

— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the device manufacturer’s name.

— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the

WWN.

• BB_Credit - the buffer-to-buffer credit (BB_Credit) value assigned to a port attached to a device. The value (normally 1 through 16 inclusive) determines the frame buffers available for the port. Ports configured for extended distance operation are assigned a BB_Credit value of 60.

Performance View

The Performance View displays statistical information about the performance of the ports. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems.

For information about the Performance View, refer to " Performing Port Diagnostics " on page -19.

Zone Set View

The Zone Set view (

Figure 3–10 ) displays a list of the active zone set, including all

zones and zone members. The active zone set name appears at the top of the list, followed by zone names, followed by zone members for each name.The table at the top of the view indicates if the default zone is enabled or disabled.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–17

Repair Information

To open the Zone Set view, click the Zone Set tab at the bottom of the Fabrics view on the HAFM main window.

3–18

Figure 3–10: Zone Sets View

Zone members appear as:

• The unique 16-digit WWN identifying the device attached to the port. If a nickname is configured, the nickname appears instead. For example:

10:00:0206:77:43:B0:1C

• A unique domain ID (1 through 15 inclusive) and port number (0 through 31). For example:

Domain 1, Port 7

The information is also useful for fault isolating E_Port segmentation problems caused by incompatible zone sets. When forming a multi-switch fabric by connecting switches with active zone sets, zone names within the active zone sets should not be duplicated. Names can be duplicated only if the member WWNs of each zone are identical. If two switches have a zone name conflict (duplicate zone names exist), the zone sets cannot merge, the connecting E_Port at each switch segments to prevent the creation of an ISL, and the switches do not form a multi-switch fabric.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

For a description of how to expand or collapse the active zone set list and an explanation of button functions at the bottom of the Zone Set View, refer to the hp

StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide (A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).

Performing Port Diagnostics

Port diagnostics are performed at the switch and product manager application. These diagnostics include:

• Inspecting port light-emitting diodes (LEDs) at the switch.

• Obtaining port degradation or failure information at the product manager

Hardware View.

• Obtaining statistical performance information for ports at the product manager

Performance View.

• Performing internal or external port loopback tests.

• Performing channel wrap tests. The tests apply only to a switch configured for

S/390 operating mode.

Port LEDs

To obtain port operational information at the switch, inspect the port LEDs. Amber and green LEDs adjacent to each port indicate operational status as follows:

• The green LED illuminates (or blinks if there is active traffic) and the amber LED extinguishes to indicate normal port operation.

• The amber LED illuminates and the green LED extinguishes to indicate a port failure.

• Both LEDs extinguish to indicate a port is operational but not communicating (no

SFP installed, no cable attached, loss of light, port blocked, or link recovery in process).

• The amber LED flashes and the green LED illuminates (or blinks if there is active traffic) to indicate beaconing is set for the port.

• The amber LED flashes and the green LED extinguishes to indicate a port is running online diagnostics, or beaconing is set and the port is not communicating

(no SFP installed, no cable attached, loss of light, port blocked, or link recovery in process).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–19

Repair Information

Hardware View

The Hardware View ( Figure 3–11

) displays a representation of and associated information about a specified switch. This information is useful to maintenance personnel for port-specific fault isolation and repair verification, link incidents, and port segmentation problems.

• Port operational state information from the Port Properties dialog box

(

Figure 3–12 ).

• Port LED behavior that emulates the operational status of the corresponding real switch. Refer to

Table 1–1 on page 1-24

for an explanation of green and amber

LED behavior.

• Colored alert symbols (yellow triangle or red diamond with yellow background)

that indicate port status. Refer to Table 1–1 on page 1-24 for an explanation of

alert symbol indications.

3–20

Figure 3–11: Hardware View

Click the port connector (leftmost port) to open the Port Properties dialog box

(

Figure 3–12 ).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Figure 3–12: Port Properties Dialog Box

The dialog box provides the following information:

• Port Number - the switch port number (0 through 15).

• Port Name - the user-defined name or description for the port.

• Type - the type of port (G_Port if nothing is attached to the port, F_Port if a device is attached to the port, and E_Port if the port is connected to another switch as part of an ISL).

• Fibre Channel Address - the Fibre Channel address identifier for the port.

• Port WWN - the Fibre Channel WWN for the port.

— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the device manufacturer’s name.

— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the

WWN.

• Attached Port WWN - the Fibre Channel WWN for the device attached to the port.

• Block Configuration - a user-configured state for the port (Blocked or

Unblocked).

• 10-100 km Configuration - a user-specified state for the port (On or Off), configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–21

Repair Information

• LIN Alerts Configuration - a user-specified state for the port (On or Off), configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.

• Beaconing - user-specified for the port (On or Off). When beaconing is enabled, a yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field.

• Link Incident - If no link incidents are recorded, None appears in the status field.

If a link incident is recorded, a summary appears describing the incident, and a yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field. Valid summaries are:

— Implicit incident.

— Bit-error threshold exceeded.

— Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.

— Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence received.

— Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.

— Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.

• Operational State - the state of the port (Online, Offline, Beaconing, Invalid

Attachment, Link Incident, Link Reset, No Light, Not Operational, Port Failure,

Segmented E_Port, or Testing). A yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field if the port is in a non-standard state that requires attention. A red and yellow diamond appears adjacent to the status field if the port fails.

• Reason - If the E_Port segments while attempting to form a multi-switch fabric, a summary appears describing the reason for segmentation. Valid summaries are:

— Incompatible operating parameters.

— Duplicate domain ID(s).

— Incompatible zoning configurations.

— Build fabric protocol error.

— No principal switch.

— No response from attached switch.

— Exchange link protocol (ELP) retransmission failure timeout.

This field also displays reasons for Invalid Attachment state:

• 01 Unknown. Invalid attachment reason cannot be determined.

• 02 ISL connection not allowed on this port. Port is configured as an F_Port, but connected to switch or director.

3–22

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

• 03 ELP rejected by the attached switch. This director/switch transmitted an exchange link protocol (ELP) frame that was rejected by the switch at the other end of the ISL.

• 04 Incompatible switch at the other end of the ISL. Interop mode for this switch is set to Open Fabric mode and the switch at the other end of the ISL is a Hewlett

Packard switch configured for Homogeneous Fabric mode.

• 05 External loopback adapter connected to the port. A loopback plug. is connected to the port and there is no diagnostic test running.

• 06 N_Port connection not allowed on this port. The port type configuration does not match the actual port use. Port is configured as an E_Port, but attaches to a node device.

• 07 Non-Hewlett Packard switch at other end of the ISL. The cable is connected to a non-Hewlett Packard switch and interop mode is set to Homogeneous fabric mode.

• 08 ISL connection not allowed on this port. The port type configuration does not match the actual port use (the port is configured as an F_Port, but attaches to a switch or director).

• 10 Port binding violation - unauthorized WWN. The WWN entered to configure port binding is not valid or a nickname was used that is not configured through the product manager for the attached device.

• 11 Unresponsive node connected to port. Possible causes are:

— Hardware problem on switch or on a connected node where ELP frames are not delivered, the response is not received, or a fabric login in (FLOGI) cannot be received. There may be problems in switch SBAR.

— Faulty or dirty cable connection.

— Faulty host bus adapters that do not send out FLOGI within reasonable time frame.

• Threshold Alert - If a threshold alert exists for the port, an alert indicator (yellow triangle) will appear by the Threshold Alert field, and the configured name for the last alert received will appear in the field.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–23

Repair Information

Performance View

The Performance View ( Figure 3–13 ) displays statistical information about the

performance of the ports. The information is useful for isolating port problems. To open the Performance View from the Hardware View, select Performance from the

View menu on the navigation control panel.

3–24

Figure 3–13: Performance View

When the Performance View opens, no port statistics or errors appear. The message

Click on gauge above to display statistics for that port appears beneath the port bar graphs.

Each port bar graph in the upper portion of the view displays the instantaneous transmit or receive activity level for the port, and is updated every five seconds. The relative value displayed is the greater of either the transmit or receive activity

(whichever value is greatest when sampled). Each port’s graph has multiple green-bar level indicators that correspond to a percentage of the maximum Fibre Channel throughput for the port (either transmit or receive). If any activity is detected for a port, at least one green bar appears.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

A red indicator on each port bar graph (high-water mark) remains at the highest level the graph has reached since the Performance View was opened. The indicator does not appear if the port is offline, and is reset to the bottom of the graph if the port detects a loss of light.

When the mouse pointer is passed over a port bar graph, the graph highlights with a blue border and an information pop-up displays adjacent to the port as follows:

• If a device is not attached to the port, the pop-up displays the port’s current state.

• If a device is attached to the port, the pop-up displays the WWN of the attached device.

• If the port is an E_Port, the pop-up displays E_Port.

• If the port is segmented, the pop-up displays Segmented E_Port.

Click a port bar graph to display statistics values for the port (bottom half of the

Performance View). Right-click a port bar graph to display statistics values for the port (bottom half of the Performance View) and access a menu to:

• Open the Port Properties, Node Properties, or Port Technology dialog boxes.

• Block or unblock the port.

• Enable or disable port beaconing.

• Perform port diagnostics.

• Enable or disable port channel wrapping. This menu option appears only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.

• Swap one Fibre Channel port address with another. This menu option appears only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.

• Clear link incident alerts.

• Reset the port.

• Configure Port Binding.

When a port is selected, the bottom half of the Performance View displays the following tables of cumulative port statistics and error count values. These statistics correspond to values defined in the Fabric Element management information base

(MIB).

• Traffic statistics.

• Class 2 statistics.

• Class 3 statistics.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–25

Repair Information

• Error statistics.

Click the Refresh button to update statistical information displayed on the

Performance View for the selected port. Click the Clear button to reset the cumulative value counts to zero on the Performance View for the selected port. A confirmation dialog box displays before the values are cleared.

Perform Loopback Tests

This section describes procedures to perform an:

• Internal loopback test - an internal loopback test checks internal port, serializer, and deserializer circuitry and checks for the presence of a SFP, but does not check fiber-optic components of the installed SFP. The test can be performed with a switch or device attached to a port.The test momentarily blocks the port and is disruptive to the attached device.

• External loopback test - an external loopback test checks all port circuitry, including fiber-optic components of the installed SFP. To perform the test, the attached switch or device must be quiescent and disconnected from the port, and a multi-mode or single-mode loopback plug must be inserted in the SFP receptacle.

Internal Loopback Test

To perform an internal loopback test for a single port:

1. Notify the customer that a disruptive internal loopback test is to be performed on a port. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached devices offline.

NOTE: An SFP transceiver must be installed in the port during the test. A switch can remain attached during the test.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select the icon representing the switch to be tested. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. When the mouse pointer is passed over the graphical port on the front view of the switch, the port highlights with a blue border and a pop-up displays Switch Port.

5. At the navigation control panel, select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu. The Port Diagnostics dialog box displays (

Figure 3–14 ).

6. Select a port for test. To select a port for test, type the port number (0 through 15) in the Port Number field.

3–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

7. At the Diagnostics Test list box, select Internal Loopback.

Repair Information

Figure 3–14: Port Diagnostics Dialog Box

8. Click Next. Beaconing initiates for the port selected for test. At the Hardware

View, a yellow triangle appears at the top of the port. At the Port Diagnostics dialog box, the message Verify selected ports are beaconing appears.

9. Verify beaconing is enabled, then click Next. The message Press START Test to

begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.

10. Click Start Test. The test begins and:

— The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button

— The message Port xx: Test running appears, where xx is the port number.

— A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right across the Completion Status field.

As a port is tested, the amber LED flashes (beacons) and the green LED extinguishes (indicating the port is blocked).

NOTE: Click Stop Test at any time to abort the loopback test.

11. When the test completes, test results appear (for each port tested) as Port xx:

Passed! or Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box. If a port fails the test, the amber LED for the port remains illuminated.

12. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box and return to the Hardware View. Beaconing is disabled for the port.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–27

Repair Information

13. Reset each tested port.

External Loopback Test

To perform an external loopback test for a single port:

1. Notify the customer that a disruptive external loopback test will be performed on a port and the fiber-optic cable or cables will be disconnected. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets attached devices offline.

NOTE: At the start of the loopback test, the port can be online, offline, blocked, or unblocked.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select the icon representing the switch for which the loopback test is to be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. When the mouse pointer is passed over the graphical port on the front view of the switch, the port highlights with a blue border and an pop-up displays Switch Port.

5. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port.

CAUTION: If name server zoning is implemented for the switch by port number, ensure the fiber-optic cables that are disconnected to perform the loopback test are reconnected properly. A change to the cable configuration disrupts zone operation and may incorrectly include or exclude a device from a zone.

6. If the port to be tested is shortwave laser (determined in

step 4 ), insert a black

multi-mode loopback plug into the port receptacle. If the port to be tested is longwave laser (also determined in

step 4 ), insert a blue single-mode loopback

plug into the port receptacle.

7. At the navigation control panel, select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance menu. The Port Diagnostics dialog box displays (

Figure 3–14 ).

8. Select a port for test. To select a port for test, type the port number (0 through 31) in the Port Number field.

9. At the Diagnostics Test list box, select External Loopback.

3–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

10. Click Next. Beaconing initiates for the port selected for test. At the Hardware

View, a yellow triangle appears at the top of the port. At the Port Diagnostics dialog box, the message Loopback plug(s) must be installed on ports being

diagnosed appears.

11. Verify loopback plug(s) are installed and click Next. The message Verify selected

ports are beaconing appears.

12. Verify beaconing is enabled, then click Next. The message Press START TEST

to begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.

13. Click Start Test. The test begins and:

— The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button

— The message Port xx: TEST RUNNING appears, where xx is the port number.

— A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right across the Completion Status field.

As a port is tested, the amber LED flashes (beacons) and the green LED illuminates (indicating loopback traffic through the port).

NOTE: Click Stop Test at any time to abort the loopback test.

14. When the test completes, test results appear (for each port tested) as Port xx:

Passed! or Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box. If a port fails the test, the amber LED for the port remains illuminated.

15. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box and return to the Hardware View. Beaconing is disabled for the port.

16. Reset each tested port.

17. Remove loopback plug(s) from the tested ports.

18. Reconnect fiber-optic jumper cables from devices to tested ports.

Perform Channel Wrap Test

A channel wrap test is a diagnostic procedure that checks S/390 host-to-switch connectivity by returning the output of the host as input. The test is host-initiated, and transmits Fibre Channel frames to a switch port. A port enabled for channel wrapping echoes the frame back to the host.

To perform a channel wrap test for a single port (S/390 mode only):

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–29

Repair Information

1. Notify the customer that a disruptive channel wrap test will be performed on a host-attached port.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select (click) the icon representing the switch for which the channel wrap test will be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. Click the port to be tested. The Port View displays.

5. Right-click the port to be tested, then select Channel Wrap from the pop-up menu.

The Channel Wrap On for Port n (where n is the port number) dialog box displays

( Figure 3–15 ).

Figure 3–15: Channel Wrap On for Port n Dialog Box

6. Click OK to enable channel wrapping for the port.

Swapping Ports

Use the port swap procedure to swap a device connection and logical port address from a failed Fibre Channel port to an operational port. Because both ports are blocked during the procedure, switch communication with the attached device is momentarily disrupted.

To perform the port swap procedure for a pair of switch ports (S/390 mode only):

1. Notify the customer a port swap procedure will be performed and a fiber-optic cable or cables will be disconnected. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the ports and sets attached devices offline.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select (click) the icon representing the switch for which the loopback test will be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

4. At the navigation control panel, select Swap Ports from the Maintenance menu.

The Swap Ports dialog box displays (

Figure 3–16

).

Figure 3–16: Swap Ports Dialog Box

5. At the First address and Second address fields, type the logical port addresses (in hexadecimal format) of the pair of ports to be swapped. The ports are automatically blocked during the procedure. Select the Unblock after swap check boxes to unblock the ports when the procedure completes.

6. Click Next. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Continuing this procedure requires varying the selected ports offline. Ask the system operator

to vary the link(s) offline, then press Next. appears.

7. Click Next. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Move the port cable(s).

Then press Next. appears.

8. Swap the fiber-optic jumper cables between the selected ports, then click Next.

9. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Ports swapped successfully. appears.

Click Next to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.

Collecting Maintenance Data

When the switch operational firmware detects a critical error, the switch automatically copies the contents of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) to a dump area in

FLASH memory on the CTP card, then transfers (through the Ethernet connection) the captured dump file from FLASH memory to the HAFM server hard drive.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–31

Repair Information

Perform the maintenance data collection procedure after a firmware fault is corrected or a failed FRU is replaced to capture the data for analysis by third-level support personnel. Maintenance data includes the dump file, hardware log, audit log, and an engineering log viewable only by support personnel. To collect maintenance data:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch for which the data collection procedure is to be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select Data Collection from the Maintenance icon.

The Save Data Collection dialog box (

Figure 3–17 ) displays.

3–32

Figure 3–17: Save Data Collection Dialog Box

4. Remove the backup disk from the HAFM server Zip drive and insert a blank Zip disk.

5. At the Save Data Collection dialog box, select the zip drive (D:\) from the Look in drop-down menu, then type a descriptive name for the collected maintenance data in the File name field. Click Save.

6. A dialog box ( Figure 3–18 ) displays with a progress bar that shows percent

completion of the data collection process. When the process reaches 100%, the

Cancel button changes to a Close button.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Figure 3–18: Data Collection Dialog Box

7. Click Close to close the dialog box.

8. Remove the Zip disk with the newly-collected maintenance data from the HAFM server Zip drive. Return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for failure analysis.

9. To ensure the QuikSync backup application operates normally, replace the original backup disk in the HAFM server Zip drive.

Clean Fiber-Optic Components

Perform this procedure as directed in this publication and when connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables from switch SFP optical transceivers (if necessary).

To clean fiber-optic components:

1. Obtain the appropriate tools (portable can of oil-free compressed air and alcohol pads) from the fiber-optic cleaning kit.

2. Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the SFP. Use compressed air to blow any contaminants from the connector as shown in part A of

Figure 3–19 .

— Keep the air nozzle approximately 50 millimeters (two inches) from the end of the connector and hold the can upright.

— Blow compressed air on the surfaces and end of the connector continuously for approximately five seconds.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–33

Repair Information

A B

Figure 3–19: Clean Fiber-Optic Components

3. Gently wipe the end-face and other surfaces of the connector with an alcohol pad as shown in part B of

Figure 3–19

. Ensure the pad makes full contact with the surface to be cleaned. Wait approximately five seconds for surfaces to dry.

4. Repeat

step 2 and

step 3 of this procedure (second cleaning).

5. Repeat

step 2 and

step 3 of this procedure again (third cleaning), then reconnect

the fiber-optic cable to the port.

Power-On Procedure

To power-on the switch:

1. One alternating current (AC) power cord is required for each power supply.

Ensure power cord(s) are available to connect the switch to facility power.

WARNING:

A Hewlett Packard-supplied power cord is provided for each switch power supply. To prevent electric shock when connecting the switch to primary facility power, use only the supplied power cord(s), and ensure the facility power receptacle is the correct type, supplies the required voltage, and is properly grounded.

2. Turn on both power switches at the rear of the unit. The unit powers on and performs power-on self-tests (POSTs).

NOTE: If two power cords are used for high availability, plug the cords into separate facility power circuits.

3. During POSTs: a. The green power (PWR) LED on the switch front panel illuminates.

3–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information b. The amber system error (ERR) LED on the switch front panel blinks momentarily while the switch is tested.

c. The green LEDs associated with the Ethernet port blink momentarily while the port is tested.

d. The green and amber LEDs associated with the ports blink momentarily while the ports are tested.

4. After successful POST completion, the green power (PWR) LED remains illuminated and all other LEDs extinguish.

5. If a POST error or other malfunction occurs, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page -7 to isolate the problem.

NOTE: When powering on the switch after removing and replacing a faulty FRU, the amber system error LED may remain illuminated. Clear the system error LED as part of the replacement procedure.

Power-Off Procedure

To power-off the switch:

1. Notify the customer the switch is to be powered off. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

2. Set the switch offline (" Set Offline State " on page -38).

3. Turn off both power switches at the rear of the unit.

4. If servicing the switch, disconnect the power cord(s) from the input power module at the rear of the switch. This step is not required when performing a power cycle.

Reset or IPL the Switch

A switch reset using the IML button (at the switch front panel) or IPL (at the product manager application) are functionally equivalent. They:

• Perform partial power-on diagnostics, reset functional logic for the CTP card, and load firmware from FLASH memory to random-access memory (RAM) without powering off the switch.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–35

Repair Information

• Reset the Ethernet local area network (LAN) interface, causing the connection to the HAFM server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.

• Automatically enable changes to an active zone configuration.

• Keep all configured fabric logins, name server registrations, and operating parameters intact.

• Automatically set the switch online. The blocked state of each Fibre Channel port remains intact.

NOTE: A switch reset or IPL should be performed only if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not reset or IPL the switch unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

Reset the Switch

Resetting the switch with the IML button causes the switch to perform an initial program load (IML) that takes approximately 30 seconds.

To reset the switch:

1. At the switch front panel, press and hold the IML button for approximately three seconds.

2. During the reset, the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link drops momentarily and the following occurs at the product manager application:

— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.

— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey square, indicating switch status is unknown.

— Illustrated FRUs (SFPs, fans, and power supplies) in the Hardware View disappear, and appear again as the connection is re-established.

IPL the Switch

To IPL the switch:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch to be IPled. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select IPL from the Maintenance menu. The

Information dialog box displays.

3–36

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

4. Click Yes to IPL the switch. During the IPL, the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link drops momentarily and the following occur at the product manager application:

— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.

— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey square, indicating switch status is unknown.

— Illustrated FRUs (SFPs, fans, and power supplies) in the Hardware View disappear, and appear again as the connection is re-established.

Set the Switch Online or Offline

This section describes procedures to set the switch online or offline. These operating states are described as follows:

• Online - when the switch is set online, an attached device can log in to the switch if the port is not blocked. Attached devices can communicate with each other if they are configured in the same zone.

• Offline - when the switch is set offline, all switch ports are set offline. The switch transmits the offline sequence (OLS) to attached devices, and the devices cannot log in to the switch.

NOTE: When the switch is set offline, the operation of attached Fibre Channel devices is disrupted. Do not set the switch offline unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

Set Online State

To set the switch online:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch to be set online. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–37

Repair Information

3. At the navigation control panel, select Set Online State from the Maintenance menu. If the switch is offline, the Set Online State dialog box displays, indicating the state is OFFLINE.

4. Click Set Online. A Warning dialog box displays, indicating the switch is to be set online.

5. Click OK. As the switch comes online, inspect the product manager application.

The State field of the Status table displays Online.

Set Offline State

To set the switch offline:

1. Notify the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select the icon representing the switch to be set offline. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

4. At the navigation control panel, select Set Online State from the Maintenance menu. If the switch is online, the Set Online State dialog box displays, indicating the state is ONLINE.

3–38

5. Click Set Offline. A Warning dialog box displays, indicating the switch is to be set offline.

6. Click OK. As the switch goes offline, inspect the product manager application.

The State field of the Status table displays OFFLINE.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Block and Unblock Ports

This section describes procedures to block or unblock the switch ports. When a port is blocked, the port is automatically set offline. When a port is unblocked, the port is automatically set online.

NOTE: When a port is blocked, the operation of an attached Fibre Channel device is disrupted.

Do not block a port unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.

Block a Port

To block a port:

1. Notify the customer the port is to be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select the icon representing the switch with the port to be blocked. The Hardware

View for the selected switch displays.

4. Move the pointer over the port and right-click the mouse to open a list of menus.

5. Select Block Port. The Block Port n dialog box displays (n is the port number).

6. Click OK. The following occur to indicate the port is blocked (and offline):

— The emulated green LED associated with the port extinguishes at the

Hardware View.

— The green LED associated with the port extinguishes at the switch.

— A check mark displays in the check box adjacent to the Block Port menu.

Unblock a Port

To unblock a port:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–39

Repair Information

2. Select the icon representing the switch with the port to be unblocked. The

Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. Move the pointer over the port and right-click the mouse to open a list of menus options.

4. Select Block Port. Note the check mark in the box adjacent to the menu item, indicating the port is blocked. The Unblock Port n dialog box displays (n is the port number).

5. Click OK. The following occur to indicate the port is unblocked (and online):

— The emulated green LED associated with the port illuminates at the Hardware

View.

— The green LED associated with the port illuminates at the switch.

— The check box adjacent to the Block Port menu option becomes blank.

Manage Firmware Versions

Firmware is the internal operating code stored on the switch’s CTP card. Up to eight versions can be stored on the HAFM server hard drive and made available for download to a switch. Service personnel can perform the following firmware management tasks:

• Determine the firmware version active on a switch.

• Add to and maintain a library of up to eight firmware versions on the HAFM server hard drive.

• Modify a firmware description stored on the HAFM server hard drive.

• Delete a firmware version from the HAFM server hard drive.

• Download a firmware version to a selected switch.

Determine a Switch Firmware Version

To determine a switch firmware version:

3–40

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch to be inspected for firmware version. The

Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.

4. The firmware version displays at the lower left corner of the dialog box in

XX.YY.ZZ format, where XX is the version level, YY is the release level, and ZZ is the patch level.

5. Click Close to return to the Hardware View.

Add a Firmware Version

The firmware version shipped with the switch is provided on the edge switch 2/16 documentation kit CD. Subsequent firmware versions for upgrading the switch are provided to customers through the HP website.

NOTE: When adding a firmware version, follow all the instructions in the release notes that accompany the firmware version. This information supplements information in this general procedure.

To add a switch firmware version to the library stored on the HAFM server hard drive:

1. Obtain the new firmware version from the HP website:

NOTE: The following path is subject to change.

a.

At the HAFM server or other personal computer (PC) with Internet access, open the HP website. The uniform resource locator (URL) is: http://thenew.hp.com/country/us/eng/support.html

NOTE: If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the customer or next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–41

Repair Information b. Follow links to HAFM software.

c.

Click the edge switch 2/16 Firmware Version XX.YY.ZZ entry, where

XX.YY.ZZ is the desired version. The Windows Save As dialog box appears.

d. Ensure the correct directory path is specified at the Save in field and the correct file is specified in the File name field. Click Save. The new firmware version is downloaded and saved to the HAFM server or PC hard drive.

e. If the new firmware version was downloaded to a PC (not the HAFM server), transfer the firmware version file to the HAFM server by diskette or other electronic means.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be added. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

4. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.

3–42

edge switch 2/16 service manual

5. Click New. The New Firmware Version dialog box displays.

Repair Information

6. Select the desired firmware version file (downloaded in

step 1 ) from the HAFM

server CD-ROM or hard drive. Ensure the correct directory path and filename appear in the File name field and click Save. The New Firmware Description dialog box displays.

7. Enter a description (up to 24 characters) for the new firmware version and click

OK. The description should include the installation date and text that uniquely identify the firmware version.

8. A Transfer Complete message box appears indicating the new firmware version is stored on the HAFM server hard drive. Click Close to close the message box.

9. The new firmware version and associated description appear in the Firmware

Library dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product manager application.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–43

Repair Information

10. To send the firmware version to a switch, refer to " Download a Firmware Version to a

Switch " on page 3-45.

Modify a Firmware Version Description

To modify the description of a switch firmware version in the library stored on the

HAFM server hard drive:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be modified. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.

4. Select the firmware version to be modified and click Modify. The Modify

Firmware Description dialog box displays.

3–44

5. Enter a modified description (up to 24 characters) for the firmware version and click OK. The description should include the installation date and text that uniquely identify the firmware version.

6. The new description for the firmware version displays in the Firmware Library dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product manager application.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Delete a Firmware Version

To delete an switch firmware version from the library stored on the HAFM server hard drive:

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch from which the firmware version is to be deleted. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.

4. Select the firmware version to be deleted and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box displays.

5. Click OK. The selected firmware version is deleted from the Firmware Library dialog box.

6. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product manager application.

Download a Firmware Version to a Switch

This procedure downloads a selected firmware version from the HAFM server library to a switch managed by the open instance of the product manager application.

NOTE: When downloading a firmware version, follow all procedural information in the release notes or EC instructions that accompany the firmware version. This information supplements information in this general procedure.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–45

Repair Information

To download a firmware version to a switch:

1. Notify the customer that a firmware version is to be downloaded to the switch. The switch resets during the firmware download, causing Fibre Channel links to momentarily drop and attached devices to log out and log back in. Data frames lost during switch reset must be retransmitted.

2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

3. Before downloading firmware version XX.YY.ZZ to a switch, ensure version

XX.YY.ZZ or higher of the HAFM application is running on the HAFM server.

a. Select About from the Help menu. The About dialog box displays the HAFM application version. Click OK to close the dialog box.

b. If required, install the correct version of the HAFM application (" Install or

Upgrade Software " on page 3-51).

4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be downloaded. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

5. As a precaution to preserve switch configuration information, perform the data

collection procedure (" Collecting Maintenance Data " on page 3-31).

6. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.

3–46

7. Select the firmware version to be downloaded and click Send. The send function verifies existence of certain switch conditions before the download begins. If an error occurs, a message displays indicating the problem must be fixed before the firmware download. Conditions that terminate the process include:

— The firmware version is being installed to the switch by another user.

— The switch-to-HAFM server link fails or times out.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

If a problem occurs and a corresponding message displays, go to " MAP 0000: Start

MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the problem. If no error occurs, the Send Firmware

confirmation box displays.

8. Click Yes. The Send Firmware dialog box displays.

As the download begins, a Sending Files message displays at the top of the dialog box. This message remains for a few moments as a progress bar travels across the dialog box to show percent completion of the download. As the download progresses, a Writing data to FLASH message displays. This message remains as the progress bar continues to travel across the dialog box. The bar progresses to

100% when the last file is transmitted to the CTP card. The switch then performs an IPL, during which the switch-to-HAFM server link drops momentarily and the following occur at the product manager application:

— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.

— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey square, indicating switch status is unknown.

— Illustrated FRUs in the Hardware View disappear, and appear again as the connection is re-established.

After the IPL, a Send firmware complete message displays as shown below.

9. Click Close to close the dialog box.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–47

Repair Information

10. Click Close to close the Firmware Library dialog box and return to the Hardware

View.

Manage Configuration Data

The product manager application provides maintenance options to back up, restore, or reset the configuration file stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NV-RAM) on the switch CTP card. Configuration data in the file include:

• Identification data (switch name, description, and location).

• Port configuration data (port names, blocked states, and port validation, auto-LIP, and LIN alert configurations).

• Operating parameters (loop mode, error detect time out value (E_D_TOV), resource allocation time out value (R_A_TOV), and preferred domain ID).

• Simple network management protocol (SNMP) configuration information, including trap recipients, community names, and write authorizations.

• Zoning configuration information, including the active zone set and default zone state.

NOTE: The switch must be set offline prior to restoring or resetting the configuration file.

Back Up the Configuration

NOTE: The ability to back up configuration data may not exist if the user has a customer-supplied server platform for the HAFM application. The server platform just have

Iomega

®

QuikSync and a Zip drive.

To back up the switch configuration file to the HAFM server (c:\HafmData):

1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

2. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be backed up. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

3. At the navigation control panel, select Backup & Restore Configuration from the

Maintenance menu. The Backup and Restore Configuration dialog box displays.

3–48

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

4. Click Backup. When the backup process finishes, the Backup Complete dialog box displays.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.

Restore the Configuration

To restore the switch configuration file from the HAFM server:

1. Notify the customer that the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

2. Set the switch offline (" Set Offline State " on page 3-38).

3. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be restored. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

5. At the navigation control panel, select Backup & Restore Configuration from the

Maintenance menu. The Backup and Restore Configuration dialog box displays.

6. Click Restore. A Warning message box displays.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–49

Repair Information

7. Click Yes. When the restore process finishes, the Restore Complete dialog box displays.

8. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.

Reset Configuration Data

NOTE: This procedure resets the switch IP address to the default of 10.1.1.10 and may disrupt server-to-switch communication.

To reset the switch data to the factory default settings:

1. Notify the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets attached devices offline.

2. Set the switch offline (" Set Offline State " on page 3-38).

3. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.

4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be reset to factory default settings. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.

5. At the navigation control panel, select Reset Configuration from the Maintenance menu. The Reset Configuration dialog box displays.

6. Click Reset. When the reset process finishes, the dialog box closes and the application returns to the Hardware View.

3–50

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

Install or Upgrade Software

This section describes the procedure to install or upgrade the HAFM application to the

HAFM server. The HAFM application includes the switch product manager and

HAFM services applications.

The HAFM application shipped with the switch is provided on the HAFM

Applications CD-ROM. Subsequent software versions for upgrading the switch are provided to customers through the HAFM Applications CD-ROM or through HP’s

Internet home page.

NOTE: When installing or upgrading a software version, follow all procedural information in the release notes or EC instructions that accompany the software version. This information supplements information in this general procedure.

To install or upgrade the HAFM application and associated applications to the HAFM server:

1. Log out of all HAFM application sessions (local and remote) and exit the HAFM application.

2. To obtain the new software version from the HAFM Applications CD-ROM, go to

step 4

.

3. To obtain the new software version from Hewlett Packard’s home page: a. At the HAFM server or other personal computer (PC) with internet access, open the Hewlett Packard home page. The URL is http://www.hewlettpackard.com.

b. Move the pointer over Services at the top of the home page to open a list of menu selections, then click the Support Login selection. The Hewlett Packard

Central Site page displays.

c. Type a member name and password (both are case sensitive) and click Sign In.

The Hewlett Packard Central Site File Library page displays.

If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the customer or next level of support.

d. Click the Microcode Downloads folder. A list of software available for download displays at the right side of the window.

NOTE: If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the customer or next level of support.

e. Click the appropriate HAFM Server Version XX.YY.ZZ entry, where

XX.YY.ZZ is the desired version. A File Download dialog box appears.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–51

Repair Information f. Select Save this program to disk and click OK.

g. Ensure the correct directory path (c:\HafmData) is specified at the Save as dialog box, and the correct file is specified in the File name field. Click Save.

The new software version executable file is downloaded and saved to the

HAFM server or PC hard drive.

h. If the executable file was downloaded to a PC (not the HAFM server), transfer the firmware version file to the HAFM server by diskette or other electronic means.

i. Go to step 5

.

4. Insert the HAFM Applications CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the HAFM server.

5. At the HAFM server, click Start at the Windows task bar. The Windows

Workstation menu displays.

6. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Run. The Run dialog box appears.

7. At the Run dialog box, select directory path (hard drive or CD-ROM drive) and filename of the executable file (

HAFM_ServerInstall.exe

) using the Browse button. The directory path and filename display in the Open field.

8. Click OK. A series of message boxes appear as the InstallAnywhere third-party application prepares to install the HAFM application software, followed by the

HAFM dialog box.

3–52

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Repair Information

9. Follow the online instructions for the InstallAnywhere program. Click Next,

Install, or Done as appropriate.

10. Power off and reboot the HAFM server PC.

a. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Windows Logon

Information dialog box.

b. Type a user name and password and click OK. The Windows desktop displays.

NOTE: If required, obtain the user name and password from the customer or next level of support.

11. The HAFM application automatically opens. At the HAFM splash screen, enter a user name, password, and HAFM server name (all are case sensitive), and click

Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.

NOTE: If required, obtain the user name, password, and HAFM server name from the customer or next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

3–53

Invisible Body

4

4

FRU Removal and Replacement

This chapter describes the removal and replacement procedures (RRPs) for the hp

StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16) field-replaceable units (FRUs). Do not remove a FRU until a failure is isolated to that FRU. If fault isolation was not

performed, see MAP 0000: Start MAP on page 2–7

.

Remove and Replace FRUs

This section describes procedures to remove and replace (RRPJ) concurrent switch

FRUs. A screwdriver is required to remove and replace the power supplies. No tools are required to remove and replace the other FRUs. All FRUs are removed and replaced while the switch is powered on and operational (concurrent FRUs). See

Chapter 5, Illustrated Parts Breakdown for FRU locations and part numbers.

FRUs

Table 4–1

lists the FRUs and electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution requirements

(yes or no) for each FRU.

Table 4–1: ESD Requirements

ESD Precaution

Requirement FRU Name

SFP LC transceiver

Power supply

Cooling fan

No

No

No

edge switch 2/16 service manual

4–1

FRU Removal and Replacement

Procedural Notes

Note the following:

1. Read the removal and replacement procedures (RRPs) for that FRU before removing the FRU.

2. Follow all WARNING and CAUTION statements and statements in the preface of this manual.

3. After completing a FRU replacement, clear the event code reporting the failure and the event code reporting the recovery from the switch Event Log (at the

HAFM server). Extinguish the amber system error (ERR) light-emitting diode

(LED) at the switch front panel.

RRP: SFP Transceiver

Use the following procedures to remove and replace an SFP transceiver from a port.

No tools are required.

Removal

To remove an SFP:

1. Identify the defective port from the illuminated amber LED at the switch or failure information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.

2. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the attached device offline.

3. Block communication to the defective port (refer to " Block a Port " on page 3-39).

4. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the SFP: a. Pull the keyed subscriber connector (LC) free from the SFP.

b. Place a protective cap over the cable connector.

5. If the SFP was not manufactured by IBM Corporation, go to step 6

. Remove an

IBM-manufactured SFP from the chassis: a. Flip the wire bale at the bottom of the SFP upward 90 degrees.

b. Use the wire bale as a handle to pull the SFP out of the chassis.

4–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

FRU Removal and Replacement

6. Remove a non-IBM SFP from the chassis: a. Simultaneously squeeze the metal latches on the sides of the SFP to disengage the SFP from the port receptacle.

b. Pull the SFP out of the chassis.

7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select Event Log option from the Logs icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event code appears in the log:

— 510 - SFP hot-insertion initiated.

Replacement

To install an SFP in a switch port:

1. Remove the replacement SFP from its shipping container.

2. If the SFP was not manufactured by IBM Corporation, go to step 3

. Insert an

IBM-manufactured SFP into the port receptacle: a. Ensure the IBM label is at the top, and the alignment groove is at the bottom.

b. Verify the SFP is aligned in the receptacle, then slide it forward until it seats firmly.

c. Flip the wire bale (handle) of the SFP downward 90 degrees.

3. Insert a non-IBM SFP into the G_Port receptacle: a. Ensure the label that identifies the OEM of the SFP is at the top, and the alignment groove is at the bottom.

b. Verify the SFP is aligned in the receptacle, then slide it forward until it seats.

4. Perform an external loopback test for the port (refer to " External Loopback Test " on

page 3-28). If the test fails, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the

problem.

5. Connect the fiber-optic jumper cable to the port SFP: a. Remove the protective cap from the cable connector. Store the cap for safekeeping.

b. Clean the cable and SFP connectors (refer to " Clean Fiber-Optic Components " on page 3-33).

c. Insert the keyed LC cable connector into the port SFP.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

4–3

FRU Removal and Replacement d. Verify that the amber LED adjacent to the port is extinguished.

6. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event code appears in the log:

— 513 - SFP hot-removal completed.

If an event code 513 does not appear in the log, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the problem.

7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View: a. Ensure no alert symbols appear that indicate a failure (yellow triangle or red diamond).

b. Click the port graphic representing the replacement SFP to open the Port

Properties dialog box. Verify that port information (port number, port name, operational state, and port technology) is correct.

If a problem is indicated, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the

problem.

8. Restore communication to the port and set the port online as directed by the

customer (refer to " Unblock a Port " on page 3-39).

9. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to " Collecting Maintenance Data " on page 3-31).

10. Clear the switch’s system error (ERR) LED: a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic

(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.

b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.

RRP: Power Supply

Use the following procedures to remove or replace a power supply from the rear of the switch. No tools are required.

Removal

To remove a power supply:

1. Identify the defective power supply from the extinguished green LED at the switch or failure information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.

4–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

FRU Removal and Replacement

2. Turn off the power switch on the power supply.

3. Disconnect the AC power cord from the power supply.

4. Rotate the power lockout lever to the right to expose the black plastic latch lever.

5. Pull the latch lever down to the horizontal position.

The power supply will disengage and back out about 1/4 inch when the lever is horizontal.

6. Use the latch lever to pull the power supply out of the chassis. Support the power supply as it exits the chassis.

WARNING: To prevent electric shock, do not reach into nonvisible areas of a switch while the switch is connected to primary facility power.

Replacement

To replace a power supply:

1. Remove the replacement power supply from its shipping container.

2. Inspect the rear of the power supply for bent or broken connector pins. If any pins are damaged, obtain a new power supply.

3. Ensure that the power switch on the power supply is turned off, the power lockout lever is rotated to the right, covering the AC connector, and the black plastic latch lever is completely down in the horizontal position.

4. Insert the power supply into the chassis until it stops.

5. Raise the black plastic latch lever to the vertical position.

The power supply cams into its seated position in the chassis.

6. Rotate the power lockout lever to the left to cover the plastic lever and expose the

AC connector.

7. Verifying that the power switch is off, connect the AC power cord to the power supply and to a facility power source.

8. Turn on the power switch.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

4–5

FRU Removal and Replacement

9. Inspect the power supply to ensure that the green LED is illuminated. If the green

LED is extinguished, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the

problem.

10. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event codes appear in the log:

— 203 - Power supply AC voltage recovery.

— 204 - Power supply DC voltage recovery.

11. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, observe the power supply graphic and ensure no alert symbols appear that indicate a failure (yellow triangle or red

diamond). If a problem is indicated, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to

isolate the problem.

12. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to " Collecting Maintenance Data " on page 3-31).

13. Clear the switch system error (ERR) LED: a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic

(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.

b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.

RRP: Cooling Fan

Use the following procedures to remove or replace a cooling fan from the rear of the switch. No tools are required.

Removal

To remove a cooling fan:

1. Identify the defective cooling fan from the illuminated amber LED on the fan or failure information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.

2. Loosen the fan retaining screw in the upper right corner of the fan. This is a captive screw that will remain in the fan assembly.

3. Grasp the fan handle and pull the fan FRU out of the chassis.

4–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

FRU Removal and Replacement

Replacement

To replace a cooling fan:

1. Remove the replacement cooling fan FRU from its shipping container.

2. Inspect the rear of the fan for bent or broken connector pins. If any pins are damaged, obtain a new fan.

3. Position the fan FRU with its retaining screw at the upper right corner (the fan cannot be inserted in any other position).

4. Push the fan FRU into the chassis to engage the connector pins until the fan faceplate is flush with the chassis.

5. Engage the screw threads and lightly tighten the screw. Over-tightening the screw may damage the FRU or chassis.

6. Inspect the fan FRU to ensure that the amber LED is extinguished. If the amber

LED is illuminated, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the

problem.

7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure one of the following event codes appears in the log:

— 310 to 315 - Nth cooling fan has recovered, where N is first to fourth (fan).

8. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, observe the fan graphic and ensure no alert symbols appear that indicate a failure (yellow triangle or red diamond). If a

problem is indicated, go to " MAP 0000: Start MAP " on page 2-7 to isolate the

problem.

9. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to " Collecting Maintenance Data " on page 3-31).

10. Clear the switch system error (ERR) LED: a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic

(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.

b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

4–7

RRP: CTP Card - Switch Replacement

Some event codes indicate a CTP card failure, as do some diagnostic paths through

MAPs. The CTP card is not a FRU, and cannot be replaced. CTP card failure requires replacement of the entire switch. If the failed switch provides a critical singular link in the fabric, and that link is still operating, it may be necessary to schedule down-time for this replacement.

Replacing a Failed Switch

NOTE: This procedure assumes that the new switch will be installed in the same location as the failed switch and will be configured the same as the failed switch.

Replacing a failed switch in an existing fabric requires the following tasks be done, in order:

• Remove the failed switch:

— Ensure the failed switch is no longer carrying traffic.

Set the switch offline.

— Using HAFM, remove the switch from the fabric.

Delete the switch from the fabric, using the HAFM product view.

— Physically disconnect and remove the switch from the mounting location.

• Set up the new switch to operate in the fabric:

— Physically mount the new switch in the mounting location.

— Verify that the new switch powers up successfully.

After successful power-on-self-tests, the green PWR LED remains on and all other front panel LEDs extinguish.

— Set the switch to operate on the LAN:

1. Connect a maintenance terminal to the 9-pin maintenance port.

2. Using Hyperterminal, connect to the edge switch 2/32.

3. Enter the default password (password).

4. At the C: prompt, type ipconfig and press enter.

5. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address the same as the failed switch and press Enter.

6. Close Hyperterminal and disconnect the maintenance terminal.

FRU Removal and Replacement

— Connect the switch to the LAN.

— Configure the switch for the HAFM application:

1. Right click in a blank area of the HAFM product view and select new.

2. Type the IP address of the switch in the new product dialog box.

3. Select the correct product type from the product type field and click OK. A new icon will display on the product view.

— Configure the switch identification:

1. Click on the new icon to open the hardware view and click the configure icon.

2. Select identification from the configure menu.

3. In the configure identification dialog box, type the name, description, location, and contact the same as the failed switch.

— Configure operating mode:

1. Set the switch offline.

2. At the hardware view, select operating parameters from the configure menu.

3. set BB_Credit, R_A_TOV, E_D_TOV, Preferred Domain ID, Switch

Priority, and Rerouting Delay the same as the failed switch, and click

Activate.

— Verify the firmware version:

1. At the hardware view, select firmware library from the maintenance icon and verify that the firmware version is the same as that running on the existing fabric. The active version is displayed at the bottom of the display. To upgrade/download the active version, select the correct version and select

SEND. The firmware will load, perhaps taking up to 10 minutes.

— Configure the ports the same as the failed switch (select ports from the configure menu).

— Configure SNMP traps, CLI, EWS the same as the failed switch.

— Set the date and time.

— Set zoning configuration:

1. At the HAFM product view, select fabric. Select the new switch icon, then zone set tab.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

4–9

FRU Removal and Replacement

2. Verify that the active zoneset is the same active zoneset that is running on the fabric, and that the default zone is disabled.

• Add the switch to the fabric:

— Connect the fibre-optic cables to the switch ports.

— Set the switch online.

— Verify that the switch successfully joins the fabric.

4–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

5

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdown for the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 field-replaceable units (FRUs). Exploded-view assembly drawings are provided for:

• Front-accessible FRUs.

• Rear-accessible FRUs.

• Miscellaneous parts.

Exploded-view illustrations portray the switch disassembly sequence. Illustrated

FRUs are numerically keyed to associated tabular parts lists. The parts lists also include part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.

Front-Accessible FRUs

The front-accessible switch FRUs are illustrated and described in Figure 5–1

and

Table

5–1 . The table includes reference numbers to the figure, part numbers, descriptions,

and quantities.

TM

RST

10/100

B 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PWR

ERR

Figure 5–1: Front-Accessible FRUs

1

edge switch 2/16 service manual

5–1

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Table 5–1: Front-Accessible FRU Parts List

Ref.

Part Number

292007-001

1

1

1

292003-001

292004-001

292004-001

Description

Base assembly, edge switch 2/16, without optics

Transceiver, optical, shortwave laser, 2.125 Gbps,

850 nm, LC (2 to 500 meters)

Transceiver, optical, longwave laser, 2.125 Gbps,

1300 nm, LC (up to 10 km)

Transceiver, optical, longwave laser, 2.125 Gbps,

1300 nm, LC

Qty.

Reference

0 to 16

0 to 16

0 to 16

Rear-Accessible FRUs

The FRUs and their part numbers differ between the two packaging systems for the switch. Use care when selecting a part number to order for replacement purposes to ensure that the part number matches the switch for which it is intended.

The rear-accessible switch FRUs are illustrated and described in Figure 5–2

and

Table

5–2 . The table includes reference numbers to the figure, part numbers, descriptions,

and quantities.

5–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

1

3

2

3

Figure 5–2: Rear-Accessible FRUs

Table 5–2: Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List

Ref.

Part Number

1

2

3

292007-001

292012-001

292010-001

Description

Base assembly, edge switch 2/16, without optics

Power supply assembly (includes one cooling fan,

P/N 292010-001)

Fan, cooling

Qty.

Reference

2

4

Miscellaneous Parts

Table 5–3 is a list of miscellaneous parts.

Table 5–3: Miscellaneous Parts

Part

Ref.

Ref

Number Description

254138-001 Power cord, 120 VAC, United States

Ref 258754-001 Power cord, AC, 5-15R

Qty.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

5–3

Ref

Ref

Ref

Ref

Ref

Ref

Table 5–3: Miscellaneous Parts (Continued)

Part

Ref.

Number Description

Ref

Ref

254139-001

258753-001

Power cord, AC Adapter/Jumper, 2.5 m

Adapter, ac, 100-240 VAC, autosense

Ref

Ref

Ref

Ref

254143-001

254144-001

254145-001

254146-001

Cable, Ethernet, 10 ft

Cable, null modem, 10 ft

Plug, loopback, shortwave

Plug, loopback, longwave

258750-001

258751-001

258752-001

254147-001

254148-001

254135-001

PC, laptop, without manuals

Drive, Zip 250, without manuals

Drive, Zip 250, power supply, universal

Rackmount kit, 9000 and 11000 series

Rackmount kit, M series

Screwdriver, with bit

Qty.

Invisible Body Tag

A

Messages

This appendix lists information and error messages that appear in pop-up message boxes at the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application and hp

StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager applications.

The first section of the appendix lists HAFM application messages. The second section lists product manager messages. The text of each message is followed by a description and recommended course of action.

HAFM Application Messages

This section lists HAFM application information and error messages in alphabetical order.

Message Description

A zone must have at least one zone member.

When creating a new zone, one or more zone members must be added.

A zone set must have at least one zone.

All alias, zone, and zone set names must be unique.

When creating a new zone set, one or more zones must be added.

When creating a new alias, zone, or zone set, the name must be unique.

Action

Add one or more zone members to the new zone.

Add one or more zones to the new zone set.

Choose a unique name for the new alias, zone, or zone set.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–1

Messages

Message Description

An HAFM application session is already active from this workstation.

Only one instance of the HAFM application is allowed to be open per remote workstation.

Are you sure you want to delete this network address?

Are you sure you want to delete this nickname?

The currently- selected network address will be deleted.

The selected nickname will be deleted from the list of nickname definitions.

Are you sure you want to delete this product?

Are you sure you want to delete this user?

Are you sure you want to delete this zone set?

Are you sure you want to delete this zone?

Are you sure you want to overwrite this zone set?

Are you sure you want to remove all members from this zone?

The selected product will be deleted from the list of product definitions.

The selected user will be deleted from the list of user definitions.

The selected zone set will be deleted from the zone library.

The selected zone will be deleted from the zone library.

The selected zone set will be overwritten in the zoning library.

All members will be deleted from the selected zone.

Action

Close all but one of the HAFM application sessions.

Click Yes to delete or No to cancel.

Click Yes to delete the nickname or No to cancel the operation.

Click Yes to delete the product or No to cancel the operation.

Click Yes to delete the user or

No to cancel the operation.

Click Yes to delete the zone set or No to cancel the operation.

Click Yes to delete the zone or No to cancel the operation.

Click Yes to overwrite or No to cancel.

Click Yes to delete the members or No to cancel the operation.

A–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Cannot connect to

HAFM server.

The HAFM application at a remote workstation could not connect to the HAFM server.

Cannot delete product.

The selected product cannot be deleted.

Action

Verify the HAFM server internet protocol (IP) address is valid.

Cannot display route.

No active zone enabled.

Cannot display route.

All switches in route must be managed by the same server.

Cannot display route.

All switches in route must support routing.

Cannot have spaces in field.

Cannot modify a zone set with an invalid name.

Rename zone set and try again.

You cannot show the route through a fabric with no active zone.

You cannot show the route through a fabric that has switches or directors that are managed by a different HAFM server.

You cannot show the route through a fabric that has switches or directors which do not support routing.

Spaces are not allowed as part of the entry for this field.

A zone set must have a valid name to be modified.

Verify the HAFM server-to-product link is up.

• If the link is up, the HAFM server may be busy.

• Another product manager instance may be open.

• The user may not have permission to delete the product.

Enable the default zone or activate a zone set before attempting to show the route.

This route cannot be shown unless all switches and directors in the route are managed by this HAFM server.

The route must contain only director 2/64; or edge switch

2/16, and edge switch 2/32 switches.

Delete spaces from the field entry.

Assign a valid name to the zone set, then click Modify.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–3

Messages

Message Description

Cannot modify a zone with an invalid name. Rename zone and try again.

Cannot modify product.

A zone must have a valid name to be modified.

The selected product cannot be modified.

Action

Assign a valid name to the zone, then click Modify.

Cannot perform operation. Fabric is unknown.

Cannot perform operation. The list of attached nodes is unavailable.

This message appears if no switches in the fabric are connected to the

HAFM server.

Verify the HAFM server-to-product link is up.

• If the link is up, the HAFM server may be busy.

• Another product manager instance may be open.

• The user may not have permission to modify the product.

Ensure at least one fabric-attached switch or director has an Ethernet connection to the HAFM server and retry the operation.

Verify an attached node is available and retry the operation.

Cannot retrieve current SNMP configuration.

Cannot save current

SNMP configuration.

Click OK to remove all contents from log.

This message appears when attached nodes are unavailable and the user attempts to modify a zone or create a new zone.

The current SNMP configuration could not be retrieved.

The current SNMP configuration could not be saved.

This action deletes all contents from the selected log.

Try again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Click OK to delete the log contents or Cancel to cancel the operation.

A–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Connection to HAFM server lost. Click OK to exit application.

The HAFM application at a remote workstation lost the network connection to the

HAFM server.

Could not export log to file.

A log file input/output

(I/O) error occurred and the file could not be saved to the specified destination.

The disk may be full or write protected.

Default zoning is not supported in Open

Fabric Mode.

Download complete.

Click OK and start the HAFM.

Duplicate community names require identical write authorizations.

A default zone cannot be enabled when the switches in a fabric are set to Open

Fabric mode.

Download of the

HAFM and product manager applications is complete.

If configuring two communities with identical names, they must also have identical write authorizations.

Duplicate name in zoning configuration.

Every name in the zoning library must be unique.

Duplicate nicknames cannot be configured.

Duplicate nickname in nickname configuration.

Duplicate

World-Wide Name in nickname configuration.

A world-wide name can be associated with only one nickname.

Action

Start the HAFM application to connect to the HAFM server.

If the disk is full, use another disk. If the disk is write protected, change the write-protect properties or use another disk.

Change the setting from

Open Fabric mode to

Homogeneous mode and retry the default zoning operation.

Start the HAFM application to continue.

Verify that both communities with the same name have the same write authorizations.

Modify (to make it unique) or delete the duplicate name.

Modify the selected nickname to make it unique.

Modify (to make it unique) or delete the selected world-wide name.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–5

Messages

Message Description

Duplicate zone in zone set configuration.

More than one instance of a zone is defined in a zone set.

Duplicate zone member in zone configuration.

Error connecting to switch.

More than one instance of a zone member is defined in a zone.

While viewing routes, the HAFM server was unable to connect to the switch. The switch failed or the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.

Error creating zone.

Error creating zone set.

Error deleting zone.

Error deleting zone set.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error.

Error reading log file.

The HAFM application encountered an error while trying to read the log.

Action

Delete one of the duplicate zones from the zone set.

Delete one of the duplicate zone members from the zone.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

A–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Error removing zone or zone member.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error.

Error transferring files

< message >.

Fabric member could not be found.

An error occurred while transferring files from the PC hard drive to the HAFM application. The message varies, depending on the problem.

A fabric member does not exist when the application prepared to find a route, find a route node, or gather route information on that fabric member.

Field cannot be blank.

Field has exceeded maximum number of characters.

The data field requires an entry and cannot be left blank.

The maximum number of data entry characters allowed in the field was exceeded.

File transfer aborted.

The user aborted the file transfer process.

Invalid character in field.

An invalid character was entered in the data field.

Action

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the file transfer operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Ensure the product is incorporated into the fabric and retry the operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Enter appropriate information in the data field.

Enter the information using the proscribed number of characters.

Verify the file transfer is to be aborted, then click OK to continue.

Remove invalid characters from the entry.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–7

Messages

Message Description

Invalid name.

One of the following invalid names was used: CON, AUX,

COM1, COM2,

COM3, COM4,

COM5, COM6,

COM7, COM8,

COM9, LPT1, LPT2,

LPT3, LPT4, LPT5,

LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,

LPT9, NUL, or PRN.

Invalid network address.

Invalid product selection.

The IP address specified for the product is unknown to the domain name server (invalid).

At the New Product dialog box, an invalid product was selected.

Invalid HAFM server address.

Invalid UDP port number.

The IP address specified for the

HAFM server is unknown to the domain name server

(invalid).

The specified user datagram protocol

(UDP) port number is invalid. The number must be an integer from 1 through 65535 inclusive.

Action

Select a valid name and retry the operation.

Verify and enter a valid product IP address.

Select a valid product and retry the operation.

Verify and enter a valid HAFM server IP address.

Verify and enter a valid UDP port number.

A–8

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Invalid World-Wide

Name.

The specified world-wide name format is invalid. The valid format is eight two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons

(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:x

x:xx).

Invalid zone in zone set.

Management session is already active from this workstation.

The defined zone no longer exists and is invalid.

An instance of the

HAFM application is already open at this workstation.

No attached nodes selected.

No nickname selected.

No product managers installed.

No routing information available.

No HAFM server specified.

An operation was attempted without an attached node selected.

No nickname was selected when the command was attempted.

No director or switch product manager application is installed on this workstation.

No information is available for the route selected.

An HAFM server is not defined to the

HAFM application.

Action

Enter a world-wide name using the correct format.

Delete the invalid zone from the zone set.

Close the previous session of the HAFM application before starting a new one.

Select an attached node and try the operation again.

Select a nickname and try again.

Install the appropriate product manager to this workstation.

Select a different route and try the operation again.

At the HAFM Login screen, type a server name in the

HAFM server field and click

Login.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–9

Messages

Message Description

No user selected.

A user was not selected when the command was attempted.

No zone member selected.

No zone selected.

A zoning operation was attempted without a zone member selected.

A zoning operation was attempted without a zone selected.

No zone selected or zone no longer exists.

No zone set active.

A zone set cannot be deactivated if there are no active zones.

No zone set selected.

A zoning operation was attempted without a zone set selected.

No zone set selected or zone set no longer exists.

A zoning operation was attempted without a zone selected, or the zone selected no longer exists in the fabric.

Only attached nodes can be displayed in this mode.

A zoning operation was attempted without a zone set selected, or the zone set you selected no longer exists in the fabric.

Users cannot display unused ports when adding ports by world-wide name.

Action

Select a user and try again.

Select a zone member and try the operation again.

Select a zone and try the operation again.

Select a zone and try the operation again.

Informational message only-no action is required.

Select a zone set and try the operation again.

Select a zone set and try the operation again.

Change the add criteria to

Add by Port.

A–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Password and confirmation don’t match.

Entries in the password field and confirmation password field do not match. The entries are case sensitive and must be the same.

Product manager instance is currently open.

Remote session support has been disabled.

A product cannot be deleted while an instance of the product manager application is open.

The connection between the specified remote workstation and the

HAFM server was disallowed.

Remote sessions are not allowed from this network address.

Resource is unavailable.

Route data corrupted.

Only IP addresses of remote workstations specified at the

Session Options dialog box are allowed to connect to the HAFM server.

The specified operation cannot be performed because the product is unavailable.

The information for this route is corrupt.

Route request timeout.

The Show Route request timed out.

Action

Enter the password and confirmation password again.

Close the product manager application, then delete the product.

Consult with the customer’s network administrator to determine if the workstation entry should be modified at the Session Options dialog box.

Consult with the customer’s network administrator to determine if the IP address is to be configured for remote sessions.

Verify the HAFM server-to-product link is up. If the link is up, the HAFM server may be busy. Try the operation again later.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–11

Messages

Message Description

Routing is not supported by the switch.

This switch or director does not support the Show

Routes feature.

HAFM error <error number 1 through 8

>.

HAFM server is shutting down.

Connection will be terminated.

The HAFM application encountered an internal error (1 through 8 inclusive) and cannot continue operation.

The HAFM application is closing and terminating communication with the attached product.

HAFM server could not log you on. Verify your username and password.

Select alias to add to zone.

Selection is not a

World-Wide Name.

Server shutting down.

The incorrect username and password (both case sensitive) were used while attempting to login to the HAFM application.

An alias was not selected before clicking Add.

The selection made is not a world-wide name.

The HAFM application is closing and terminating communication with the attached product.

Action

Select a different switch or director to show the route.

Contact the next level of support to report the problem.

Reboot the HAFM server. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Verify the user name and password with the customer’s network administrator and retry the operation.

Select an alias before clicking

Add.

Select a valid world-wide name before performing this operation.

Reboot the HAFM server. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

A–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

SNMP trap address not defined.

If an SNMP community name is defined, a corresponding SNMP trap recipient address must also be defined.

Switch is not managed by HAFM.

The Administrator user cannot be deleted.

The selected switch or director is not managed by the

HAFM application.

The administrator user is permanent and cannot be deleted from the

Configure Users dialog box.

The link to the director is not available.

The maximum number of aliases has already been configured.

The maximum number of members has already been configured.

The maximum number of nicknames has already been configured.

The Ethernet connection between the HAFM server and

Director is down or unavailable.

The maximum number of aliases allowed was reached.

The maximum number of zone members that can be defined to the application was reached.

The maximum number of nicknames that can be defined to the HAFM application was reached.

Action

Enter a corresponding SNMP trap recipient address.

Select a different switch or director.

Informational message only-no action is required.

Establish and verify the network connection.

Delete an existing alias before adding a new alias.

Delete an existing zone member before adding a new zone member.

Delete an existing nickname before adding a new nickname.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–13

Messages

Message Description

The maximum number of open products has already been reached.

The maximum number of open products allowed was reached.

The maximum number of products has already been configured.

The maximum number of products of this type has already been configured.

The number of managed Hewlett

Packard products

(48) that can be defined to the HAFM application was reached.

The number of

Hewlett Packard products of this type

(48) that can be defined to the HAFM application was reached.

The maximum number of remote network addresses has already been configured.

The maximum number of HAFM application sessions has been reached.

A maximum of four IP addresses for remote workstations can be configured at the

Session Options dialog box. That number was reached.

A maximum of eight concurrent remote management sessions can be configured at the

Session Options dialog box. The specified number was reached.

Action

Close a product manager session (existing open product) before opening a new session.

Delete an existing product before adding a new product.

Delete an existing product of this type before adding a new product.

Delete an existing IP address before adding a new IP address.

Increase the number of remote sessions allowed (if less than four), or terminate a session before attempting to initiate a new session.

A–14

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

The maximum number of HAFM server network addresses has already been configured.

The number of HAFM server IP addresses that can be defined to the HAFM application was reached.

The maximum number of users has already been configured.

The maximum number of zones allowed has already been configured.

The maximum number of zone sets has already been configured.

The maximum number of zones per zone set has already been configured.

The number of users

(16) that can be defined to the HAFM application was reached.

The maximum number of zones that can be defined was reached.

The maximum number of zone sets that can be defined was reached.

The maximum number of zones that can be defined in a zone set was reached.

The nickname does not exist.

The nickname is already assigned.

Either use a different name or do not save the name as a nickname.

The entered nickname does not exist in the fabric.

The entered nickname already exists in the fabric.

Each nickname must be unique.

Action

Delete an existing IP address before adding a new address.

Delete an existing user before adding a new user.

Delete an existing zone before adding a new zone.

Delete an existing zone set before adding a new zone set.

Delete an existing zone before adding a new zone to the zone set.

Configure the nickname to the appropriate product or select an existing nickname.

Define a different nickname.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–15

Messages

A–16

Message Description

The HAFM server is busy processing a request from another product manager.

The HAFM server PC is processing a request from another instance of a product manager application, and cannot perform the requested operation.

The software version on this HAFM server is not compatible with the version on the remote HAFM server.

The zoning library conversion must be completed before continuing.

A second HAFM server PC (client) connecting to the

HAFM server must be running the same software version to log in.

The zoning library conversion is incomplete and the requested operation cannot continue.

This network address has already been assigned.

This product is not managed by this

HAFM server.

The specified IP address was assigned and configured. A unique address must be assigned.

The product selected is not managed by this HAFM server.

This user name has already been assigned.

Too many members defined.

Action

Wait until the process is completes, then perform the operation again.

Upgrade the software version on the downlevel HAFM server PC.

Complete the zoning library conversion, then retry the operation.

Consult with the customer’s network administrator to determine a new IP address to be assigned and configured.

The specified user name is already assigned and configured.

The maximum number of zone members that can be defined was reached.

Select a product managed by this HAFM server or go to the

HAFM server that manages the affected product.

Modify (to make it unique) or delete the duplicate name.

Delete an existing zone member before adding a new zone member.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

You do not have a compatible version of the HAFM server software. In order for the HAFM application to function properly, a compatible version must be installed on the client machine.

Click OK to install a compatible version.

You do not have rights to perform this action.

The HAFM application version running on the HAFM server differs from the version running on the remote workstation (client). A compatible version must be downloaded from the HAFM server.

You must define an

SMTP server address.

You must define at least one E-mail address.

Configured user rights do not allow this operation to be performed.

A simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server address must be defined and configured for e-mail to be activated.

At least one e-mail address must be defined and configured for e-mail to be activated.

You must define at least one remote network address.

You must download the HAFM client via the web install.

At least one IP address for a remote workstation must be configured for a remote session to be activated.

An attempt was made to download the

HAFM application to a remote workstation

(client) using an improper procedure.

Action

Download a compatible version of the HAFM application to the remote workstation (client) using the web install procedure.

Verify user rights with the customer’s network administrator and change as required.

Define the SMTP server address at the Configure

E-Mail dialog box.

Define an e-mail address at the Configure E-Mail dialog box.

Define an IP address for at least one remote workstation at the Session Options dialog box.

Download a compatible version of the HAFM application to the remote workstation (client) using the web install procedure.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–17

Messages

Message Description

Zones configured with port numbers are ignored in Open

Fabric Mode.

While in Open Fabric mode, zones configured using port numbers are enforced through world-wide names.

Zoning by port number is ignored in

Open Fabric Mode.

Zoning name already exists.

While in Open Fabric mode, zones configured using port numbers are enforced through world-wide names.

Duplicate zone names are not allowed in the zoning library.

Action

Informational message only - no action is required.

Informational message only - no action is required.

Modify (to make it unique) or delete the duplicate zone name.

Edge-16 Switch Product Manager Messages

This section lists switch product manager information and error messages in alphabetical order.

Message Description

A product manager instance is already open.

Only one instance of the product manager application can be open at one time.

All port names must be unique.

A duplicate Fibre

Channel port name was configured. All port names must be unique.

Action

Close the open product manager application so the desired instance of the product manager application can be opened.

Reconfigure the Fibre

Channel port with a unique name.

A–18

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Another product manager is currently performing a firmware install.

Only one instance of the product manager application can install a firmware version to the switch or director at a time.

Are you sure you want to delete firmware version?

Are you sure you want to send firmware version?

Cannot have spaces in field.

This message requests confirmation to delete a firmware version from the

HAFM server’s firmware library.

This message requests confirmation to send a firmware version from the

HAFM server’s firmware library to the switch or director.

Spaces are not allowed as part of the entry for this field.

Cannot retrieve current SNMP configuration.

Cannot retrieve diagnostics results.

The switch or director

SNMP configuration cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Switch or director diagnostic results cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Action

Wait for the firmware installation process to complete and try the operation again.

Click Yes to delete the firmware version or No to abort the operation.

Click Yes to send the firmware version or No to abort the operation.

Delete spaces from the field entry.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–19

Messages

Message Description

Cannot retrieve director date and time.

The switch or director date and time cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Cannot retrieve director state.

Cannot retrieve port configuration.

The switch or director state cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

The port configuration cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Cannot retrieve port information.

Cannot retrieve port statistics.

Port information cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Port statistics cannot be retrieved by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Action

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

A–20

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Cannot run diagnostics on a port that is failed.

Port diagnostics

(loopback tests) cannot be performed on a port that has failed any previous diagnostic (power-on diagnostic, online diagnostic, or loopback test). The amber LED associated with the port illuminates to indicate the failed state.

Cannot run diagnostics on a port that is not installed.

Cannot run diagnostics while a device is logged-in to the port.

Port diagnostics

(loopback tests) cannot be performed on a port that does not have a small form factor pluggable

(SFP) optical transceiver installed.

Port diagnostics

(internal loopback test) cannot be performed on a port while an attached

Fibre Channel device is logged in.

Cannot save port configuration.

The port configuration cannot be saved at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Action

Reset the port and perform diagnostics again.

Install a transceiver in the port and perform diagnostics again.

Ensure the device is logged out and perform diagnostics again.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–21

Messages

Message Description

Cannot save SNMP configuration.

The switch or director

SNMP configuration cannot be saved at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Cannot set director date and time.

Cannot set director state.

The switch or director date and time cannot be set at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

The switch or director state cannot be set at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Cannot set fibre channel parameters.

Cannot start data collection.

Fibre Channel parameters for the switch or director cannot be set at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

The data collection procedure cannot be started by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Action

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

A–22

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Cannot start port diagnostics.

Port diagnostics cannot be started at the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Click OK to remove all contents from log.

Connection to HAFM server lost. Click OK to exit application.

This action deletes all contents from the selected log.

The HAFM application at a remote workstation lost the network connection to the

HAFM server.

Could not export log to file.

Could not find firmware file.

Could not remove dump files from server.

A log file I/O error occurred and the file could not be saved to the specified destination. The disk may be full or write protected.

A firmware version could not be found because the data directory structure for the HAFM server is corrupt.

Dump files could not be deleted from the

HAFM server because the notebook PC or product manager application is busy.

Action

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Click OK to delete the log contents or Cancel to cancel the operation.

Start the HAFM application to connect to the HAFM server.

If the disk is full, use another disk. If the disk is write protected, change the write-protect properties or use another disk.

Reinstall the HAFM and product manager applications. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–23

Messages

Message Description

Could not stop port diagnostics.

Port diagnostics could not be stopped by the product manager application because the Ethernet link is down or busy, or because the switch or director is busy.

Could not write firmware to flash.

Date entered is invalid.

A firmware version could not be written from the HAFM server to FLASH memory on the

Director’s CTP2 card.

The date is entered incorrectly at the

Configure Date and

Time dialog box.

Individual field entries may be correct, but the overall date is invalid (for example, a day entry of 31 for a

30-day month).

Device applications should be terminated before starting diagnostics. Press

NEXT to continue.

Director must be offline to configure.

Port diagnostics

(loopback tests) cannot be performed on a port while an attached device application is running.

The switch or director must be set offline prior to configuring

Fibre Channel operating parameters.

Action

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation again. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Verify each entry is valid and consistent.

Terminate the device application and perform diagnostics again.

Set the switch or director offline, reconfigure parameters at the Configure

Operating Parameters dialog box, and retry the operation.

A–24

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Do you want to continue with IPL?

This message requests confirmation to initial program load

(IPL) the switch or director.

Duplicate Community names require identical write authorizations.

Error retrieving port information.

Duplicate community names are entered at the Configure SNMP dialog box, and have different write authorizations.

An error occurred at the product manager application while retrieving port information because the Ethernet link is down or busy.

Error retrieving port statistics.

Error stopping port diagnostics.

An error occurred at the product manager application while retrieving port statistics because the

Ethernet link is down or busy.

An error occurred at the product manager application while attempting to stop port diagnostics from running because the

Ethernet link is down or busy.

Action

Click OK to IPL the switch or director or No to cancel the operation.

Delete the duplicate community name or make the write authorizations consistent.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–25

Messages

Message Description

Error transferring files

< message >.

An error occurred while transferring files from the PC hard drive to the product manager application.

The message varies, depending on the problem.

Field cannot be blank.

The data field requires an entry and cannot be left blank.

File transfer aborted.

The user aborted the file transfer process.

File transfer is in progress.

Action

Try the file transfer operation again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Enter appropriate information in the data field.

Verify the file transfer is to be aborted, then click OK to continue.

Informational message only-no action is required.

Firmware download timed out.

Firmware file I/O error.

Firmware file not found.

Internal file transfer error received from director.

A firmware file is being transferred from the HAFM server hard drive, or a data collection file is being transferred to a diskette.

A firmware download operation timed out and aborted.

A firmware download operation aborted because a file I/O error occurred.

The firmware version is not installed (or was deleted) from the firmware library at the

HAFM server.

The switch or director detected an internal file transfer error.

Retry the operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Add the firmware version to the library and retry the operation.

Retry the operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

A–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Invalid character in field.

An invalid character was entered in the data field.

Invalid firmware file.

Invalid network address.

The file selected for firmware download is not a firmware version file.

The IP address specified for the product is unknown to the domain name server (invalid).

Invalid port number.

Invalid response received from director.

Invalid HAFM server address.

Invalid UDP port number.

The Fibre Channel number entered is invalid. The port number must be an integer from 0 through 63 inclusive.

An error occurred at the switch or director during a firmware download operation.

The IP address specified for the

HAFM server is unknown to the domain name server

(invalid).

The specified user datagram protocol

(UDP) port number is invalid. The number must be an integer from 1 through 65535 inclusive.

Action

Remove invalid characters from the entry.

Select the correct firmware version file and retry the operation.

Verify and enter a valid product IP address.

Verify and enter a valid port number.

Retry the firmware download operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Verify and enter a valid HAFM server IP address.

Verify and enter a valid UDP port number.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–27

Messages

Message Description

Invalid value for

BB_Credit.

At the Configure

Operating

Parameters dialog box, the buffer-to-buffer credit

(BB_Credit) value must be an integer from 1 through 60 inclusive.

Invalid value for day

(1 - 31).

Invalid value for

E_D_TOV.

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the DD value (day) must be an integer from 1 through 31 inclusive.

At the Configure

Operating

Parameters dialog box, the error detect time-out value

(E_D_TOV) must be an integer from 2 through 600 inclusive.

Invalid value for hour

(0 - 23).

Invalid value for minute (0 - 59).

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the HH value (hour) must be an integer from 0 through 23 inclusive.

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the MM value

(minute) must be an integer from 0 through 59 inclusive.

Action

Verify and enter a valid number.

Verify and enter a valid date.

Verify and enter a valid number.

Verify and enter a valid time.

Verify and enter a valid time.

A–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Invalid value for month (1 - 12).

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the MM value

(month) must be an integer from 1 through 12 inclusive.

Invalid value for

R_A_TOV.

Invalid value for second (0 - 59).

At the Configure

Operating

Parameters dialog box, the resource allocation time-out value (R_A_TOV) must be an integer from 10 through 1200 inclusive.

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the SS value

(second) must be an integer from 0 through 59 inclusive.

Invalid value for year.

At the Configure Date and Time dialog box, the YYYY value

(year) must be a four-digit value.

Invalid World-Wide

Name.

The specified world-wide name format is invalid. The valid format is eight two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons

(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:x

x:xx).

Action

Verify and enter a valid date.

Verify and enter a valid number.

Verify and enter a valid time.

Verify and enter a four-digit value for the year.

Enter a world-wide name using the correct format.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–29

Messages

Message Description

Link dropped.

The HAFM server-to-switch or director Ethernet link was dropped.

Log is currently in use.

Maximum number of versions already installed.

Access to the log is denied because the log was opened by another instance of the product manager application.

The number of firmware versions that can be defined to the HAFM application’s firmware library was reached.

No file was selected.

Action requires the selection of a file.

No firmware versions to delete.

There are no firmware versions in the firmware library to delete, therefore the operation cannot be performed.

No firmware version was selected.

A file was not selected in the

Firmware Library dialog box before an action, such as modify or send, was performed.

Action

Retry the operation. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Delete an existing firmware version before adding a new version.

Select a file.

Informational message only-no action is required.

Click on a firmware version in the dialog box to select it, then perform the action again.

A–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

Performing this action will overwrite the date/time on the director.

Warning that occurs when configuring the date and time through the

Configure Date and

Time dialog box, that the new time or date will overwrite the existing time or date set for the switch or director.

Performing this operation will change the current state to

Offline.

Performing this operation will change the current state to

Online.

Periodic Date/Time synchronization must be cleared.

Product manager error < error number

5001 or 5002 >.

Product manager instance is currently open.

This message requests confirmation to set the switch or director offline.

This message requests confirmation to set the switch or director online.

Action cannot be performed because

Periodic Date/Time

Synchronization option is active.

At the Configure

Operating

Parameters dialog box, the R_A_TOV entry must be greater than E_D_TOV entry.

A product manager window is open.

Verify that you want to overwrite the current date or time.

Action

Click OK to set the switch or director offline or Cancel to cancel the operation.

Click OK to set the switch or director online or Cancel to cancel the operation.

Click Periodic Date/Time

Synchronization check box in

Configure Date and Time dialog box (Configure menu) to clear check mark and disable periodic date/time synchronization.

Verify and change one of the entries to make the relationship valid.

Informational message only.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–31

Messages

A–32

Message Description

Send firmware failed.

A firmware download operation failed.

SNMP trap address not defined.

Action

Retry the firmware download operation. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

Enter a corresponding SNMP trap recipient address.

Start diagnostics failed. The test is currently running.

Stop diagnostics failed. The test is already running.

System diagnostics cannot run. The

Operational Status is invalid.

The add firmware process has been aborted.

The data collection process failed.

If an SNMP community name is defined, a corresponding SNMP trap recipient address must also be defined.

Diagnostics for the port was already started from the Port

Diagnostics dialog box

Diagnostics for the port was not running and the Stop was selected on the Port

Diagnostics dialog box. Diagnostics quit for the port, but Stop button remains enabled.

System diagnostics cannot run on switch or directors or switches with failed ports.

The user aborted the process to add a firmware version to the HAFM server’s firmware library.

An error occurred while performing the data collection procedure.

Informational message.

Verify port operation. Retry diagnostics for port and select

Stop from the dialog box. If problem persists, contact your service representative.

Replace failed ports.

Verify the firmware addition is to be aborted, then click OK to continue.

Try the data collection procedure again. If the problem persists, contact the next level of support.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Messages

Message Description

The data collection process has been aborted.

The director did not accept the request.

The user aborted the data collection procedure.

The switch or director cannot perform the requested action.

The director did not respond in the time allowed.

The director is busy saving maintenance information.

The director must be offline to configure.

While waiting to perform a requested action, the switch or director timed out.

The switch or director cannot perform the requested action because it is busy saving maintenance information.

This configuration task requires the switch or director to be offline.

The Ethernet link dropped.

The firmware file is corrupted.

The firmware version already exists.

The Ethernet connection between the HAFM server and the switch or director is down or unavailable.

A firmware version file is corrupt.

This firmware version already exists in

HAFM server’s firmware library.

Action

Verify the data collection procedure is to be aborted, then click OK to continue.

Retry the operation. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Retry the operation later. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Take the switch or director offline and retry the action.

Establish and verify the network connection.

Contact the next level of support to report the problem.

Informational message only-no action is required.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

A–33

Messages

Message Description

The link to the director is not available.

The Ethernet connection between the HAFM server and the switch or director is down or unavailable.

The HAFM server is busy processing a request from another product manager.

Threshold alerts are not supported.

The HAFM server PC is processing a request from another instance of a product manager application, and cannot perform the requested operation.

Threshold alerts are not supported in firmware releases before 1.03.00.

Unable to save data collection file to destination.

You do not have rights to perform this action.

The HAFM server could not save the data collection file to the specified location

(PC hard drive, diskette, or network).

Configured user rights do not allow this operation to be performed.

Action

Establish and verify the network connection.

Wait until the process is completes, then perform the operation again.

Informational message.

Retry the operation. If the condition persists, contact the next level of support.

Verify user rights with the customer’s network administrator and change as required.

A–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B

Event Codes

This appendix lists all three-digit hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 event codes and provides detailed information about each code. Event codes are listed in numerical order and in tabular format.

An event is an occurrence (state change, problem detection, or problem correction) that requires user attention or that should be reported to a system administrator or service representative. An event usually indicates a switch operational state transition, but may also indicate an impending state change (threshold violation). An event may also provide information only, and not indicate an operational state change. Event codes are grouped as follows:

• 000 through 199 - system events.

• 200 through 299 - power supply events.

• 300 through 399 - fan module events.

• 400 through 499 - CTP card events.

• 500 through 599 - port module events.

• 600 through 699 - SBAR module events.

• 700 through 799 - Reserved for future use.

• 800 through 899 - Thermal

Events can be recorded in the switch Event Logs at the HAFM server, or at a remote workstation if E-mail and call-home features are enabled. An event may also illuminate the system error (ERR) light-emitting diode (LED) on the front panel.

In addition to numerical event codes, the tables in this appendix also provide a:

• Message - a brief text string that describes the event.

• Severity - a severity level that indicates event criticality as follows:

— 0 - informational.

— 2 - minor.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–1

Event Codes

— 3 - major.

— 4 - severe (not operational).

• Explanation - a complete explanation of what caused the event.

• Action - the recommended course of action (if any) to resolve the problem.

• Event Data - supplementary event data (if any) that appears in the event log in hexadecimal format.

• Distribution - check marks in associated fields indicate where the event code is reported (front panel, HAFM server, or host).

B–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

System Events (000 through 199)

Event Code: 001

Message: System power-down.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Informational.

The switch was powered off or disconnected from the facility AC power source. The event code is distributed the next time the switch powers on, but the date and time of the code reflect the power-off time.

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

No action required.

No supplementary data included with the event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 011

Message: Login Server database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Following an initial machine load (IML) or firmware download, the Login Server database failed its cyclic redundancy check (CRC) validation. All Fabric Services databases are initialized to an empty state, resulting in an implicit Fabric logout of all attached devices.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–3

Event Codes

Event Code: 021

Message: Name Server database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Following an IML or firmware download, the Name Server database failed its CRC validation. All Fabric Services databases are initialized to an empty, state resulting in an implicit Fabric logout of all attached devices.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 031

Message: SNMP request received from unauthorized community.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

An SNMP request containing an unauthorized community name was received and rejected with an error. Only requests containing authorized SNMP community names as configured through the switch Product Manager application are allowed.

Add the community name to the SNMP configuration using the switch Product Manager application.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 051

Message: Management Server database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Following an IML, or firmware download, the Management Server database failed its

CRC validation. All Management Services databases are initialized to an empty state, resulting in an implicit logout of all devices logged in to the Management Server.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 052

Message: Management Server internal error.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

An operating error (internal to the switch) was detected by the Management Server subsystem.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–5

Event Codes

Event Code: 061

Message: Fabric Controller database invalid.

Severity: Minor.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Following an IML, or firmware download, the Fabric Controller database failed its CRC validation. All Fabric Controller databases are initialized to an empty state, resulting in a momentary loss of interswitch communication capability.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 062

Message: Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

The fabric controller software detected that a path to another fabric element (director or switch) traverses more than three interswitch links (ISLs or hops). This may result in

Fibre Channel frames persisting in the fabric longer than standard timeout values allow.

If possible, reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two directors or switches traverses no more than three ISLs.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 070

Message: E_Port is segmented.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

A switch E_Port recognized an incompatibility with an attached fabric element (director or switch), preventing the switch from participating in the fabric. A segmented port does not transmit Class 2 or Class 3 traffic (data from attached devices), but transmits Class

F traffic (management and control data from the attached director or switch). Refer to the event data for the segmentation reason.

Action depends on the segmentation reason specified in the event data.

Action:

Event

Data:

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the segmentation reason as follows:

1 = Incompatible operating parameters. Ether the resource allocation time out value

(R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the switch and another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the R_A_TOV and

E_D_TOV to make the values consistent for all fabric directors and switches.

2 = Duplicate domain ID. The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the switch’s Domain ID to make it unique.

3 = Incompatible zoning configurations. The same name is applied to a zone for the switch and another fabric element (director or switch), but the zones contain different zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same name contain identical zone members.

4 = Build fabric protocol error. A protocol error was detected during incorporation of the switch into the fabric. Disconnect the E_Port link, reconnect the link, and initial program load (IPL) the switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

5 = No principal switch. No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.

6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout). The switch periodically verifies operation of attached fabric elements (directors or switches). The switch E_Port

(at the operational switch) times out and segments if the attached device does not respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection procedure (at the attached device) and return the Zip disk to

Hewlett Packard support personnel.

7 = ELP retransmission failure timeout. A switch that exhibits a hardware or link failure attempted to join a fabric and transmitted multiple exchange link protocol (ELP) frames to a fabric element (director or switch). However, because of the problem, the switch did not receive responses to the ELP frames, and did not receive a fabric login

(FLOGI) frame. After five ELP transmission attempts, the switch E_Port (failed switch) times out and segments. Refer to

MAP 0000: Start MAP

to perform hardware fault isolation at the failed switch.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–7

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event Code: 070 (continued)

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 071

Message: Switch is isolated.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Informational.

The switch is isolated from other fabric elements (directors or switches). This event code is accompanied by one or more 070 event codes. Refer to the event data for the segmentation reason.

Action:

Event

Data:

Action depends on the segmentation reason specified in the event data.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4) specifies the segmentation reason as follows:

1 = Incompatible operating parameters. Ether the resource allocation time out value

(R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the switch and another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the R_A_TOV and

E_D_TOV to make the values consistent for all fabric directors and switches.

2 = Duplicate domain ID. The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the switch’s Domain ID to make it unique.

3 = Incompatible zoning configurations. The same name is applied to a zone for the switch and another fabric element (director or switch), but the zones contain different zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same name contain identical zone members.

B–8

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event

Data

(continued

):

Distributio n:

Event Code: 071 (continued)

4 = Build fabric protocol error. A protocol error was detected during incorporation of the switch into the fabric. Disconnect the E_Port link, reconnect the link, and IPL the switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

5 = No principal switch. No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.

6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout). The switch periodically verifies operation of attached fabric elements (directors or switches). The switch E_Port

(at the operational switch) times out and segments if the attached device does not respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection procedure (at the attached device) and return the Zip disk to

Hewlett Packard support personnel.

7 = ELP retransmission failure timeout. A switch that exhibits a hardware or link failure attempted to join a fabric and transmitted multiple ELP frames to a fabric element

(director or switch). However, because of the problem, the switch did not receive responses to the ELP frames, and did not receive an FLOGI frame. After five ELP transmission attempts, the switch E_Port (failed switch) times out and segments. Refer to

MAP 0000: Start MAP

to perform hardware fault isolation at the failed switch.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 072

Message: E_Port connected to unsupported switch.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

The switch is attached (through an ISL) to an incompatible fabric element (director or switch).

Disconnect the ISL.

No supplementary data included with this event.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–9

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 080

Message: Unauthorized world-wide name.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

The world-wide name of the device or switch plugged in the indicated port is not authorized for that port.

Change the port binding definition or plug the correct device or switch into this port.

Byte 0 = failing port number.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–11

Event Codes

Power Supply Events (200 through 299)

Event Code: 200

Message: Power supply AC voltage failure.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Major.

Alternating current (AC) input to the indicated power supply is disconnected or AC circuitry in the power supply failed. The second power supply assumes the full operating load for the switch.

Ensure the power supply is connected to facility AC power, and verify operation of the facility power source. If the AC voltage does not recover (indicated by event code 203), replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the

Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 201

Message: Power supply DC voltage failure.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Major.

Direct current (DC) circuitry in the power supply failed. The second power supply assumes the full operating load for the switch.

Replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the

Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

B–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 202

Message: Power supply thermal failure.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Action:

The thermal sensor associated with a power supply indicates an overheat condition that shut down the power supply. The second power supply assumes the full operating load for the switch.

Replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the

Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 203

Message: Power supply AC voltage recovery.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

AC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share operating load for the switch.

No action required.

No supplementary data included with the event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–13

Event Codes

Event Code: 204

Message: Power supply DC voltage recovery.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

DC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share operating load for the switch.

No action required.

No supplementary data included with the event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 206

Message: Power supply removed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

A power supply was removed while the Switch was powered on and operational. The second power supply assumes the full operating load for the switch.

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

No action required or install an operational power supply.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–14

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 207

Message: Power supply installed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

A redundant power supply was installed with the switch powered on and operational.

Both power supplies adjust to share operating load for the switch.

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

No action required.

No supplementary data included with the event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 208

Message: Power supply false shutdown.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Switch operational firmware nearly shut down the indicated power supply as a result of failure or facility power loss or voltage fluctuation.

Confirm operation of facility power. If subsequent power loss events occur, replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–15

Event Codes

Fan Module Events (300 through 399)

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Event Code: 300

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Major.

One cooling fan (out of six) failed or is rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The remaining fans are operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fan.

Replace the indicated fan module.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Event Code: 301

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Major.

Two cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The remaining fans are operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.

Replace the indicated fan modules.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

B–16

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Event Code: 302

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Three cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.

Replace the indicated fan modules.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Event Code: 303

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Four cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.

Replace the indicated fan modules.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–17

Event Codes

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Event Code: 304

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Five cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.

Replace the indicated fan modules.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Message: Cooling fan propeller failed.

Severity: Major.

Event Code: 305

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

All six cooling fans failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the fan modules.

Replace the fans

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

B–18

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 310

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

One cooling fan (out of six) recovered or the associated fan module was replaced. All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 311

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Two cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

Indicator

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–19

Event Codes

Event Code: 312

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Three cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced.

All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 313

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Four cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced.

All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–20

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 313

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Five cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 315

Message: Cooling fan propeller recovered.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

All cooling fans recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All fans are operational.

No action required.

The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–21

Event Codes

CTP2 Card Events (400 through 499)

NOTE: The term CTP card refers to the main circuit board of the Edge Switch 2/16, not to a separate card that contains the CTP. The CTP is an integral part of the main circuit board.

Event Code: 400

Message: Power-up diagnostics failure.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Major.

Power-on self tests (POSTs) detected a faulty field-replaceable unit (FRU) as indicated by the event data.

Replace the failed FRU with a functional FRU. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty FRU to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

Byte 0 = FRU code as follows: 01 = backplane, 02 = CTP2 card, 03 = SBAR, 05 = fan module, 06 = power supply, and 08 through 0F = UPM cards.

Byte 1 = FRU slot number.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 410

Message: CTP card reset.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Informational.

The CTP card reset after a switch power-on, hardware IML, or software IPL. An IPL can be user-initiated at the switch- Product Manager application, or occur automatically after a firmware fault (event code 411). The event data indicates the type of reset.

Action:

Event

Data:

No action required.

Byte 0 = reset type as follows: 00 = power-on or single CTP2 card hot-insert, 02 = IML,

04 = IPL,

08 = reset by other CTP2 card, 40 = partition switch, or 80 = dual CTP2 card hot-insert.

B–22

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–23

Event Codes

Event Code: 411

Message: Firmware fault.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Firmware executing on the CTP card encountered an unexpected operating condition and dumped the operating state to FLASH memory for retrieval and analysis. The dump file is automatically transferred from the switch to the HAFM Server, where it is stored for retrieval through the data collection procedure.

All Fibre Channel port connections reset after the fault and subsequent IPL. Attached devices must login to the switch to resume operations.

Action: Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

Bytes 0 through 3 = fault identifier, least significant byte first.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 421

Message: Firmware download complete.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Informational.

A switch firmware version was downloaded from the HAFM Server or embedded web server. The event data indicates the firmware version in hexadecimal format xx.yy.zz

bbbb, where xx is the release level, yy is the maintenance level, zz is the interim release level, and bbbb is the build ID.

No action required.

B–24

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Bytes 0 and 1 = ASCII pair indicating release level (30 31 indicates release 01).

Byte 2 = ASCII value for a period (2E).

Bytes 3 and 4 = ASCII pair indicating maintenance level (30 34 indicates maintenance release 04).

Byte 5 = ASCII value for a period (2E).

Bytes 6 and 7 = ASCII pair indicating interim release level (30 30 indicates interim release 00).

Byte 8 = ASCII value for a period (2E).

Bytes 9 through 12 = Four ASCII values indicating build ID (30 30 34 38 indicates build

ID 0048).

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–25

Event Codes

Event Code: 423

Message: CTP firmware download initiated.

Severity: Informational.

The HAFM server initiated download of a new firmware version to the switch.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

No action required.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 430

Message: Excessive Ethernet transmit errors.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Transmit error counters for the CTP card Ethernet adapter (sum of all counters) exceeded a threshold. This does not indicate a CTP failure; it indicates a problem with the Ethernet cable, hub, or device on the same Ethernet segment. Event data counters are represented in hexadecimal format with the least significant byte first.

Verify the Ethernet cable, hub, and other devices are properly connected and operational.

Bytes 0 through 3 = sum of all transmit errors (total_xmit_error).

Bytes 4 through 7 = frame count where Ethernet adapter does not detect carrier sense at preamble end (loss_of_CRSs_cnt).

Bytes 8 through 11 = frame count where Ethernet adapter does not detect a collision within 64 bit times at transmission end (SQE_error_cnt).

Bytes 12 through 15 = frame count where Ethernet adapter detects a collision more than

512 bit times after first preamble bit (out_of_window_cnt). Frame not transmitted.

Bytes 16 through 19 = frame count where transmission is more than 26 ms

(jabber_cnt). Frame not transmitted.

Bytes 20 through 23 = frame count where Ethernet adapter encounters 16 collisions while attempting to transmit a frame (16coll_cnt). Frame not transmitted.

B–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 431

Message: Excessive Ethernet receive errors.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Informational.

Receive error counters for the CTP card Ethernet adapter (sum of all counters) exceeded a threshold. This does not indicate a CTP failure; it indicates a problem with the Ethernet cable, hub, or device on the same Ethernet segment. Event data counters are represented in hexadecimal format with the least significant byte first.

Verify the Ethernet cable, hub, and other devices are properly connected and operational.

Bytes 0 through 3 = sum of all receive errors (total_recv_error).

Bytes 4 through 7 = frame count where received frame had from 1 to 7 bits after last received full byte (dribble_bits_cnt). CRC error counter updated but frame not processed.

Bytes 8 through 11 = frame count where received frame had bad CRC

(CRC_error_cnt). Frame not processed.

Bytes 12 through 15 = frame count received with less than 64 bytes (runt_cnt).

Broadcast frames count but do not contribute to threshold. Frame not processed.

Bytes 16 through 19 = frame count received with more than 1518 bytes

(extra_data_cnt). Broadcast frames count but do not contribute to threshold. Frame not processed.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–27

Event Codes

Event Code: 432

Message: Ethernet adapter reset.

Severity: Minor.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

The CTP card Ethernet adapter was reset in response to an internally detected error. A card failure is not indicated. The switch-to-HAFM Server connection terminates, but automatically recovers after the reset.

Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

Bytes 0 through 3 = reason for adapter reset, least significant byte first

(reset_error_type) 1 = completion notification for timed-out frame transmission.

Switch HAFM Server Host

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event

Log

4

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 433

Message: Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Action:

A non-recoverable error was detected on the CTP card Ethernet adapter and the LAN connection to the HAFM Server terminated. All Fibre Channel switching functions remain unaffected. Because Ethernet communication is lost, no failure indication is externally reported.

Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Bytes 0 through 3 = LAN error type, where 01 = hard failure and 04 = registered fault.

Bytes 4 through 7 = LAN error subtype.

Bytes 8 through 11 = fault identifier.

Switch HAFM Server Host

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

Event

Log

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

B–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 440

Message: Embedded port hardware failed.

Severity: Major.

The embedded port hardware detected a fatal CTP error.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

Byte 0 = CTP2 slot position (00 or 01).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Switch HAFM Server

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

Event

Log

4

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–29

Event Codes

Event Code: 442

Message: Embedded port anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the embedded port.

No action required. An additional event code is generated if this incident exceeds an error threshold or results in a port failure.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Byte 0 = port number.

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.port.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.

Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Byte 14 = SBAR.

Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 460

Message: Management request out of range.

Severity: Informational

Explanatio n:

Action:

This event occurs when requests passed from the managing tool (generally HAFM) to the switch do not meet data boundary specifications. This event is most likely to be triggered if a user attempt to activate a zone set that is larger than the maximum defined zone set size.

The switch found request data from the management tool to be larger or smaller than expected. The connection to the management tool will be temporarily lost. After the link is re-established, verify that all information changed in the managing tool is within the specified ranges. For example, verify that the zones and zone members in a zone set fall within the limits stated in the user manual. Try sending the request again.

None Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–31

Event Codes

Port Events (500 through 599)

NOTE: In the Edge Switch 2/16, ports are not included on separate assemblies (UPM cards), therefore are not FRUs. Ports are an integral part of the switch’s main circuit board. UPM card events apply to a single port as indicated by byte 13 of event data.

Event Code: 502

Message: UPM card anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the indicated port.

No action required.

Byte 0 = UPM slot position (00 through 0F) (not applicable).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1

Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Byte 14 = SBAR (not applicable).

Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.

Switch HAFM Server

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event

Log

4

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–32

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 507

Message: Loopback diagnostics port failure.

Severity: Informational.

A loopback diagnostic test detected a Fibre Channel port failure.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this diagnostic failure results in a hard port failure.

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 through 11 = reason code specific.

Byte 12 = test type.

Switch HAFM Server

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event

Log

4

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–33

Event Codes

Event Code: 508

Message: Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the indicated

Fibre Channel port.

No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this anomaly results in a hard port failure.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.

Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Byte 14 = SBAR.

Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 510

Message: SFP optical transceiver hot-insertion initiated.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Informational.

Installation of a small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver was initiated with the switch powered on and operational. The event indicates that operational firmware detected the presence of the transceiver.

No action required.

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

B–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 512

Message: SFP optical transceiver nonfatal error.

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Minor.

Switch firmware detected an SFP optical transceiver non-fatal error.

Replace the failed transceiver with a functional transceiver of the same type.

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Switch HAFM Server

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event

Log

4

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

Event Code: 513

Message: SFP optical transceiver hot-removal completed.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

A SFP optical transceiver was removed while the switch was powered on and operational.

No action required.

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–35

Event Codes

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4

Call-Hom e

Host

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–36

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Event Code: 514

Message: SFP optical transceiver failure.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

A SFP optical transceiver failed. The amber LED corresponding to the port illuminates to indicate the failure. Other ports remain operational if their LEDs are extinguished.

Replace the failed transceiver with a functional transceiver of the same type.

Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).

Byte 1 = engineering reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–37

Event Codes

SBAR Events (600 through 699)

NOTE: In the Edge Switch 2/16, the SBAR is not a separate assembly, therefore not a FRU. It is an integral part of the switch’s main circuit board. SBAR failure requires replacement of the entire switch.

Event Code: 602

Message: SBAR assembly anomaly detected.

Severity: Informational.

Explanatio n:

Action:

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch operational firmware detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or operating status of the SBAR.

No action required. An event code 604 is generated if the SBAR fails.

Byte 0 = SBAR slot position (00 or 01) (not applicable).

Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.

Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.

Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.

Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.

Byte 12 = detecting port.

Byte 13 = connected port.

Byte 14 = participating SBAR assembly (not applicable).

Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.

Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.

Switch HAFM Server Host

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

Event

Log

4

E-Mail Call-Hom e

Sense

Info

Link

Incident

B–38

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Event Codes

Thermal Events (800 through 899)

Event Code: 810

Message: High temperature warning (CTP card thermal sensor).

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Major.

The thermal sensor associated with a CTP card indicates the warm temperature threshold was reached or exceeded.

Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

Indicator

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 811

Message: Critically hot temperature warning (CTP card thermal sensor).

Severity:

Explanatio n:

Action:

Major.

The thermal sensor associated with a CTP card indicates the hot temperature threshold was reached or exceeded.

Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

edge switch 2/16 service manual

B–39

Event Codes

Event Code: 812

Message: CTP card shutdown due to thermal violation.

Severity: Major.

Explanatio n:

Action:

A CTP failed and was powered off because of excessive heat. This event follows an indication that the hot temperature threshold was reached or exceeded (event code

811).

Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

Event Code: 850

Message: System shutdown due to CTP card thermal violations.

Severity: Severe.

The switch powered off because of excessive thermal violations on the CTP card.

Explanatio n:

Action: Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.

No supplementary data included with this event.

Event

Data:

Distributio n:

Switch

EWS

Event

Log

4

System

Error

LED

4

HAFM Server

Event

Log

E-Mail

4 4

Call-Hom e

4

Host

Sense

Info

4

Link

Incident

B–40

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

This glossary defines terms used in this manual or related to this product and is not a comprehensive glossary of computer terms.

NUMERICS

8B/10B

A data encoding scheme developed by IBM, translating byte-wide data to an encoded 10-bit format.

10BaseT

An implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Ethernet standard on 24-gauge unshielded twisted-pair wiring, a baseband medium at 10 Mbps.

100BaseT

An implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Ethernet standard on 24-gauge unshielded twisted-pair wiring, a baseband medium at 100 Mbps.

A

AC

See

alternating current .

access

The ability and means necessary to store data in, to retrieve data from, to transfer data into, to communicate with, or to make use of any resource of a storage device, a system, or area such as random access memory (RAM) or a register.

access control

A list of all devices that can access other devices across the network and the permissions associated with that access. See also

persistent binding

; zoning

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–1

Glossary access time

The amount of time, including seek time, latency, and controller time, necessary for a storage device to retrieve information. active configuration

In S/390 mode, the director or switch configuration that is determined by the status of the connectivity attributes.

active field-replaceable unit

Active FRU. A FRU that is currently operating as the active, and not the backup FRU. See also

backup field-replaceable unit

.

active FRU

See

active field-replaceable unit .

active port address matrix

In S/390 mode, an active port address matrix is the port address matrix that is currently active

or operational on an attached director or switch. See also connectivity capability .

active zone set

A single zone set that is active in a multiswitch fabric and is created when a specific zone set is enabled. This zone set is compiled by checking for undefined zones or aliases. See also

zone ; zone set .

address

(1) To refer to a device or an item of data by its address (A, I). (2) The location in a computer where data is stored. (3) In data communication, the unique code assigned to each device or workstation connected to a network. (4) The identifier of a location, source, or destination (D). address name

Synonym for

port name

.

agent

Software that processes queries on behalf of an application and returns replies.

alarm

(1) A notification of an abnormal condition within a system that provides an indication of the location or nature of the abnormality to either a local or remote alarm indicator. (2) A simple network management protocol (SNMP) message notifying an operator of a network or device problem.

alert panel

This panel, located below the navigation control panel, displays an alert symbol that indicates the current state of the switch.

alias

A nickname representing a world-wide name.

Glossary–2

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary allowed connection

In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the attribute that when set, establishes dynamic connectivity capability. Contrast with

blocked connection

. See connectivity attribute . See also

dynamic connectivity ;

unblocked connection

.

allowed port connection

In S/390 mode, this attribute establishes dynamic connectivity capability. alternating current

AC. Electric current that reverses direction at regular sinusoidal intervals (D). Contrast with

direct current .

American National Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASCII. A standard character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8-bit including parity check) used for information exchange between systems and equipment (D).

American National Standards Institute

ANSI. A national organization consisting of producers, consumers, and general interest groups that establishes procedures by which accredited organizations create and maintain industry standards in the United States (A).

ANSI

See

American National Standards Institute .

API

See

application program interface .

application

(1) The use to which a data processing system is put, for example, a payroll application, an airline reservation application, or a network application. (2) A collection of software components used to perform specific types of work on a computer (D).

application client

The source object of the small computer system interface (SCSI) commands and destination for the command responses.

application program

(1) A program that is specific to the solution of an application problem. Synonymous with application software. (2) A program written for or by a user that applies to the user's work, such as a program that does inventory control or payroll. (3) A program used to connect and communicate with stations in a network, enabling users to perform application-oriented activities (I).

application program interface

API. A set of programming functions and routines that provides access between protocol layers, such as between an application and network services.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–3

Glossary application-specific integrated circuit

ASIC. An asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) local area network/ wide area network

(LAN/WAN) circuit using cell relay transport technology. ASICs are designed for a specific application or purpose, such as implementing the lower-layer Fibre Channel protocol (FC-0).

They are particularly suited to sending video and audio information, as well as text. ASICs differ from general-purpose devices such as memory chips or microprocessors.

archive

(1) To copy files to a long-term storage medium for backup. (2) Removing data, usually old or inactive files, from a system and permanently storing the data on removable media to reclaim system hard disk space. area

The second byte of the node port (N_Port) identifier.

ASCII

See

American National Standard Code for Information Interchange .

ASIC

See

application-specific integrated circuit

.

attribute

In S/390 mode, the connection status of the address on a configuration matrix: allowed, blocked, or prohibited.

Audit Log

Log summarizing actions (audit trail) made by the user. There are two types of Audit Logs: the director or switch Audit Log, and the HAFM Audit Log.

(1) Director or switch Audit Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that provides a history of all configuration changes made to an individual director or switch from the respective Product Manager application, a simple network management protocol (SNMP) management workstation, a Fibre Connection (FICON) or open systems host, or the maintenance port. This information is useful for administrators and users. Contrast with

HAFM Audit Log . See also

Event Log ;

Hardware Log

;

Link Incident Log ;

Threshold Alert

Log .

(2) See

HAFM Audit Log .

availability

The accessibility of a computer system or network resource.

Glossary–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

B b

See

bit .

B

See

byte .

backbone

Cable on which two or more stations or networks may be attached, typically used to link computer networks at one site with those at another. Smaller branch networks are sometimes called ribs. backplane

The backplane provides direct current (DC) power distribution and connections for all logic cards.

backup field-replaceable unit

Backup FRU. When an active FRU fails, an identical backup FRU takes over operation automatically (failover) to maintain director or switch and Fibre Channel link operation. See also

active field-replaceable unit .

backup FRU

See

backup field-replaceable unit

.

bandwidth

(1) The amount of data that can be sent over a given circuit. (2) A measure of how fast a network can move information, usually measured in Hertz (Hz). baud

The unit of signaling speed, expressed as the maximum number of times per second the signal can change the state of the transmission line or other medium. The units of baud are seconds to the negative 1 power. Note: With Fibre Channel scheme, a signal event represents a single transmission bit.

BB_Credit

See

buffer-to-buffer credit .

beaconing

Use of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on ports, port cards, field-replaceable units (FRUs), and switches to aid in the fault-isolation process. When enabled, active beaconing will cause LEDs to flash in order for the user to locate field-replaceable units (FRU’s), switches, or directors in cabinets or computer rooms.

ber

See

bit error rate .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–5

Glossary bezel

A removable panel that covers empty drive bays and port cards. bidirectional

In Fibre Channel protocol, the capability to simultaneously communicate at maximum speeds in both directions over a link.

bit

Abbreviated as b. (1) Binary digit, the smallest unit of data in computing, with a value of zero or one (D). (2) A bit is the basic data unit of all digital computers. It is usually part of a data byte or data word; however, a single bit can be used to control or read logic ON/OFF functions. (3) A bit is a single digit in a binary number. Bits are the basic unit of information capacity on a computer storage device. Eight bits equals one byte.

bit density

Expressed as bits per inch (bpi), the number of bits that can be written on one inch of track on a disk surface. bit error rate

Abbreviated as ber. Ratio of received bits that contain errors to total of all bits transmitted.

bits per inch

Abbreviated as bpi. Indicates the density of information on a hard drive. blocked connection

In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the attribute that, when set, removes the communication capability of a specific port. A blocked address is disabled so that no other address can be connected to it. A blocked attribute supersedes a dedicated or prohibited attribute on the same address. Contrast with

allowed connection ;

unblocked connection

. See

connectivity attribute

. See also dynamic connection ; dynamic connectivity .

blocked port

In a director or switch, the attribute that when set, removes the communication capability of a specific port. A blocked port continuously transmits the offline sequence.

boot

(1) To start or restart a computer. (2) Loading the operating system. bpi

See

bits per inch

.

B_Port

See

bridge port

. bps

Bits per second.

Glossary–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

Bps

Bytes per second. bridge

(1) An attaching device that connects two local area network (LAN) segments to allow the transfer of information from one LAN segment to the other. A bridge can connect the LAN segments directly by network adapters and software in a single device, or can connect network adapters in two devices through software and use of a telecommunication link between the two adapters. (2) A functional unit that connects two LANs that use the same logical link control

protocol, but may use different media access control protocols (T). Contrast with router . (3) A

device that connects and passes packets between two network segments that use the same communications protocol.

bridge port

B_Port. (1) In Fibre Channel protocol, a fabric inter-element port used to connect bridge devices with E_Ports on a switch. B_Ports provide a subset of E_Port functionality. (2) A term for a physical interface between the fabric (switch) and a bridge device. The interface is identical to an expansion port (E_Port), but it does not participate in full expansion port protocols. As such, it does not assign domain IDs or participate in routing protocol. See also

expansion port ;

fabric port ;

generic port

;

node port ;

segmented expansion port .

British thermal unit

Btu. The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound of water by one degree Fahrenheit (D).

broadband

Large bandwidth communications channel capable of multiple, parallel high-speed transmissions.

broadcast

In Fibre Channel protocol, to send a transmission to all node ports (N_Ports) on a fabric. See

also

broadcast frame .

broadcast frame

In Fibre Channel protocol, a frame whose destination address specifies all node ports

(N_Ports) in the fabric. See also

broadcast .

Btu

See

British thermal unit

.

buffer

Storage area for data in transit. Buffers compensate for differences in processing speeds between devices. See

buffer-to-buffer credit .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–7

Glossary buffer-to-buffer credit

BB_Credit. (1) The maximum number of receive buffers allocated to a transmitting node port

(N_Port) or fabric port (F_Port). Credit represents the maximum number of outstanding frames that can be transmitted by that N_Port or F_Port without causing a buffer overrun condition at the receiver. (2) The maximum number of frames a port can transmit without receiving a receive ready signal from the receiving device. BB_Credit can be adjustable to provide different levels of compensation.

bypassed port

If a port is bypassed, all serial channel signals route past the port. A device attached to the port cannot communicate with other devices in the loop. byte

Abbreviated as B. A byte generally equals eight bits, although a byte can equal from four to ten bits. A byte can also be called an octet See also

octet

.

C call-home

Product feature which enables the HAFM server to automatically contact a support center and report system problems. The support center server accepts calls from the HAFM server, logs reported events, and can notify one or more support center representatives.

cascade

Linking two or more Fibre Channel switches to form a larger switch or fabric. The switched link through fiber cables attached between one or more expansion ports (E_Ports). See also

expansion port .

CBY

Channel operations running in byte mode. This occurs when a channel is attached to a converter and specifies the I/O operation mode for the channel path under the I/O configuration program (IOCP) channel path identifier (CHPID) statement ‘Type’ parameter.

Contrast with

CVC

.

cell

In S/390 mode, in a port address matrix, a cell is the intersection point between a horizontal port address and a vertical port address. A selected cell is indicated by the cell cursor.

chained

Two directors or switches that are physically attached.

Glossary–8

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary channel

(1) A system element that controls one channel path, and whose mode of operation depends on the type of hardware attached. Each channel controls an I/O interface between the channel control element and the attached control units (D). (2) Point-to-point link that transports data from one point to the other. (3) A connection or socket on the motherboard to controller card.

A motherboard may have only one or two channels (primary and secondary). If a motherboard has only one channel, it may be necessary to add a controller card to create a secondary channel.

channel-attached

(1) Pertaining to direct attachment of devices by data I/O channels to a computer. (2)

Pertaining to devices attached to a control unit by cables, not telecommunication lines (D).

Synonymous with local .

channel wrap test

A diagnostic procedure that checks S/390 host-to-director or host-to-switch connectivity by returning the output of the host as input. The test is host-initiated and transmits Fibre Channel frames to a director or switch port. A director or switch port enabled for channel wrapping echoes the frame back to the host.

Class 2 Fibre Channel service

Provides a connectionless (not dedicated) service with notification of delivery or nondelivery between two node ports (N_Ports).

Class 3 Fibre Channel service

Provides a connectionless (not dedicated) service without notification of delivery or nondelivery between two node ports (N_Ports). Synonymous with

datagram .

Class F Fibre Channel service

Used by switches to communicate across interswitch links (ISLs) to configure, control, and coordinate a multiswitch fabric.

Class of Fibre Channel service

Defines the level of connection dedication, acknowledgment, and other characteristics of a connection.

command

(1) A character string from an external source to a system that represents a request for system action. (2) A request from a terminal to perform an operation or execute a program. (3) A value sent through an I/O interface from a channel to a control unit that specifies the operation to be performed (D).

communications tray

The communications tray is a sliding tray located in the middle of the Fabricenter cabinet. The communications tray holds the laptop personal computer (PC), zip drive, and zip drive power supply.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–9

Glossary community name (SNMP)

A name that represents an simple network management protocol (SNMP) community that the agent software recognizes as a valid source for SNMP requests. A product recognizes a management station as a valid recipient for trap information when the station’s community names are configured.

community profile

Information that specifies which management objects are available to what management domain or simple network management protocol (SNMP) community name.

community (SNMP)

A relationship between an simple network management protocol (SNMP) agent and a set of

SNMP managers that defines authentication, access control, and proxy characteristics.

component

(1) Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit. (2) A functional part of an operating system; for example, the scheduler or supervisor (D).

concurrent firmware upgrade

Firmware is upgraded without disrupting switch operation.

concurrent maintenance

Ability to perform maintenance tasks, such as removal or replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs), while a hardware product is operating. configuration data

The collection of data that results from configuring product and system operating parameters.

For example, configuring operating parameters, simple network management protocol

(SNMP) agent, zoning configurations, and port configurations through the Product Manager application, results in a collection of configuration data. Configuration data includes: identification data, port configuration data, operating parameters, simple network management protocol (SNMP) configuration, and zoning configuration. A configuration backup file is required to restore configuration data if the control processor (CTP) card in a nonredundant director 2/64 is removed and replaced. connectionless

Nondedicated link. Typically used to describe a link between nodes which allows the switch to forward Class 2 or Class 3 frames as resources (ports) allow. Contrast this with the dedicated bandwidth that is required in a Class 1 Fibre Channel Service (FC-1) point-to-point link.

connectivity

The ability of devices to link together.

Glossary–10

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary connectivity attribute

In S/390 mode, the characteristic that determines port address status for the director or switch.

See

allowed connection ;

blocked connection ;

connectivity capability

;

connectivity control

;

dynamic connection ; dynamic connectivity

;

unblocked connection

.

connectivity capability

(1) The capability that allows attachment of a device to a system without requiring physical reconfiguration of either the device or the interconnections. (2) The director or switch capability that allows logical manipulation of link connections to provide physical device attachment (D). See also

active port address matrix ;

connectivity attribute

;

connectivity control .

connectivity control

In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the method used to change port address connectivity attributes and determine the communication capability of the link attached to the port (D). See also

active port address matrix ;

connectivity attribute ; connectivity capability .

connector

Synonym for

optical fiber connector

.

console

See

personal computer

;

server

.

control processor card

CTP card. Circuit card that contains the director or switch microprocessor. The CTP card also initializes hardware components of the system after power-on. The card may contain an RJ-45 twisted pair connector. In the Edge Switch 2/16 and Edge Switch 2/32, the CTP card is the main circuit board of the switch and is not replaceable (not a FRU).

credit

See

buffer-to-buffer credit .

CTP card

See

control processor card .

customer support

Synonym for

technical support .

CVC

Channel operations running in block mode. This occurs when a channel is attached to a converter. This specifies the I/O operation mode for the channel path under the I/O configuration program (IOCP) channel path identifier (CHPID) statement Type parameter.

Contrast with

CBY

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–11

Glossary

D database

A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and providing on-demand data for multiple users. (T) data directory

Critical information for all managed products (including directors and switches). Information stored here includes:

• All configuration data

• All log files

• Call-home settings

• Firmware library

• Zoning library datagram

Synonym for

Class 3 Fibre Channel service .

dB

See

decibel .

dBm

Decibels referenced to one milliwatt. Zero dBm equals one milliwatt, with a logarithmic relationship as the value increases (D).

DC

See

direct current .

decibel

Abbreviated as dB. A standard unit used to express gain or loss of optical power, expressed as the ratio of input power to output power on a logarithmic basis (D).

default

Pertaining to an attribute, value, or option that is assumed by a system when none is explicitly specified (D, I). default zone

A zone that contains all attached devices that are not members of a separate active zone.

destination

A point or location, such as a processor, director or switch, or server, to which data is transmitted (D).

Glossary–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary device

(1) Mechanical, electrical, or electronic hardware with a specific purpose (D). See also

managed product .

(2) See

node .

diagnostics

(1) The process of investigating the cause or nature of a problem in a product or system. (2)

Procedures or tests used by computer users and service personnel to diagnose hardware or software problems (D).

dialog box

A pop-up window in the user interface with informational messages or fields to be modified or completed with desired options.

direct current

DC. Electric current that continuously flows in one direction (D). Contrast with

alternating current .

director

An intelligent, highly-available, Fibre Channel switch providing any-to-any port connectivity between nodes (end devices) on a switched fabric. The director sends data transmissions (data frames) between nodes in accordance with the address information present in the frame headers of those transmissions.

diskette

A thin magnetic disk enclosed in a plastic jacket, which is removable from a computer and is used to store and transport data (D).

diskette drive

The hardware mechanism by which a computer reads data from and writes data to removable diskettes (D).

DNS name

Domain name system or domain name service. Host or node name for a device or managed product that is translated to an Internet protocol (IP) address through a domain name server. domain

A Fibre Channel term describing the most significant byte in the node port (N_Port) identifier for the Fibre Channel device. It is not used in the Fibre Channel small computer system interface (FC-SCSI) hardware path ID. It is required to be the same for all SCSI targets logically connected to a Fibre Channel adapter.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–13

Glossary domain ID

Domain identifier. A number that uniquely identifies a switch in a multiswitch fabric. A distinct domain ID is automatically allocated to each switch in the fabric by the principal switch. The preferred domain ID is the domain ID value that a switch requests from the principal switch. If the value has not been allocated to another switch in the fabric, it will be granted by the principal switch and will become the requesting switch’s active domain ID. The active domain ID is the domain ID that has been assigned by the principal switch and that a switch is currently using. domain name server

In TCP/IP, a server program that supplies name-to-address translation by mapping domain name to internet addresses. (D)

DRAM

See

dynamic random access memory

.

drop-down menu

A menu that appears when a heading in a navigation bar is clicked on with the mouse. The objects that appear in the drop-down menus are organize by their headings in the navigation bar.

duplex

In data communication, pertaining to transmission in which data is sent and received at the same time (D). Contrast with

half duplex .

duplex connector

An optical fiber component that terminates jumper cable fibers in one housing and provides physical keying for attachment to a duplex receptacle (D). duplex receptacle

A fixed or stationary optical fiber component that provides a keyed attachment method for a duplex connector (D). dynamic connection

A connection between two ports, established or removed by the directors and that, when

active, appears as one continuous link. See connectivity attribute

. See also allowed connection ;

blocked connection ;

connectivity capability ;

dynamic connectivity ;

unblocked connection .

dynamic connectivity

The capability that allows connections to be established and removed at any time.

dynamic random access memory

DRAM. Random access memory that resides in a cell comprised of a capacitor and transistor.

DRAM data deteriorates (that is, is dynamic) unless the capacitor is periodically recharged by the controlling microprocessor. DRAM is slow, but relatively inexpensive (D). Contrast with

static random access memory .

Glossary–14

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

E

EAF

See

enhanced availability feature .

EDI

See

electronic data interchange

.

E_D_TOV

See

error-detect time-out value .

EE-PROM

See

electronically erasable programmable read-only memory .

HAFM Audit Log

HAFM Audit Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that provides a history of user actions performed at the HAFM server through the HAFM application. This information is useful for system administrators and users. See also

Audit Log ;

HAFM Event Log ; HAFM

Product Status Log

; HAFM Session Log .

HAFM Event Log

HAFM Event Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that provides a record of events or error conditions recorded by the HAFM Services application. Entries reflect the status of the application and managed directors and switches. Information associated with a call-home failure is intended for use by maintenance personnel to fault isolate the problem

(modem failure, no dial tone, etc.), while information provided in all other entries is generally intended for use by third-level support personnel to fault isolate more significant problems.

See also

HAFM Audit Log ; HAFM Product Status Log ;

HAFM Session Log ;

Event Log .

HAFM application

HP StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application. (1) Software application that is the system management framework providing the user interface for managing Fibre Channel connectivity products. (2) The software application that implements the management user interface for all managed hardware products. The HAFM application can run both locally on the HAFM server and remotely on a user workstation.

HAFM Product Status Log

Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Product Status Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that records an entry when the status of a director or switch changes. The log reflects the previous status and current status of a managed product, and indicates the instance of a Product Manager application that should be opened to investigate a problem. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. See

also

HAFM Audit Log ; HAFM Event Log

;

HAFM Session Log .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–15

Glossary

HAFM server

HAFM server. A laptop shipped with the product for the purpose of running the HAFM application and HAFM Services applications.

HAFM Session Log

HAFM Session Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that records a session (login and logout) history for the HAFM server, including the date and time, user name, and network address of each session. This information is useful for system administrators and users. See

also

HAFM Audit Log ; HAFM Event Log

;

HAFM Product Status Log .

EIA

See

Electronic Industries Association .

electromagnetic interference

EMI. Undesirable electromagnetic emissions generated by solar activity, lightning, and electronic devices. The emissions interfere with or degrade the performance of another electronic device (D).

electronically erasable programmable read-only memory

A memory chip that can be loaded with data and later erased and loaded with update information.

electronic data interchange

EDI. The electronic transfer of preformatted business documents, such as purchase orders and bills of lading, between trading partners.

Electronic Industries Association

EIA. The governing body that publishes recommended standards for physical devices and associated interfaces. For example, RS-232 is the EIA standard that defines computer serial port connectivity (D). See also

Telecommunications Industry Association .

electronic mail

E-mail. Any communications service that permits the electronic transmission and storage of messages and attached or enclosed files. electrostatic discharge

ESD. The undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage or degrade electronic circuitry (D).

e-mail

See

electronic mail .

Glossary–16

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary embedded web server interface

The interface provides a graphical user interface (GUI) similar to the Product Manager application, and supports director or switch configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic operations. With director or switch firmware installed, administrators or operators with a browser-capable personal computer (PC) and an Internet connection can monitor and manage the director or switch through an embedded web server interface.

embedded web server interface timeout

If the embedded web server interface is running but no user activity occurs, (such as viewing different pages, refreshing, or reconfiguring information), the application times out after 30 minutes. The user must log in again. A login dialog box displays if the user attempts to access any pages after the timeout has occurred.

embedded web server interface window

The window for the embedded web server interface. The window is divided into two separate panels: the navigation panel on the left, and the main panel on the right.

EMI

See

electromagnetic interference

.

enhanced availability feature

EAF. A backup field-replaceable unit (backup FRU) that is ordered and installed to provide redundancy and reduce disruption in case of failure.

enterprise

The entire storage system. The series of computers employed largely in high-volume and multi-user environments such as servers or networking applications; may include single-user workstations required in demanding design, engineering and audio/visual applications.

E_Port

See

expansion port .

error-detect time-out value

E_D_TOV. The time the switch waits for an expected response before declaring an error condition. error log

See

Event Log

.

error message

Indication that an error has been detected (D).

ESD

See

electrostatic discharge .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–17

Glossary

Ethernet

A widely implemented local area network (LAN) protocol that uses a bus or star topology and serves as the basis for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 standard, which specifies the physical and software layers.

Ethernet hub

A device used to connect the HAFM server and the directors it manages.

event code

A three-digit number that specifies the exact event that occurred. This code provides information on system failures, such as hardware failures, failure locations, or general information on normal system events.

Event Log

Record of significant events that have occurred on the director or switch (director or switch

Event Log) or through the HAFM Services application (HAFM Event Log). There are two

Event Logs: director or switch Event Log, and HAFM Event Log.

(1) Director or switch Event Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that provides a history of events for an individual director or switch, such as system events, degraded operation, FRU failures, FRU removals and replacements, port problems, Fibre

Channel link incidents, and HAFM server-to-product communication problems. All detected software and hardware failures are recorded in the Event Log. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. Contrast with

HAFM Event

Log

. See also Audit Log ;

Hardware Log ;

Link Incident Log ;

Threshold Alert Log .

(2) See HAFM Event Log .

exchange

A term that refers to one of the Fibre Channel protocol “building blocks,” composed of one or more nonconcurrent sequences. expansion port

E_Port. Physical interface on a Fibre Channel switch within a fabric, that attaches to an E_Port on another Fibre Channel switch through an interswitch link (ISL) to form a multiswitch

fabric. See also bridge port ;

fabric port ;

generic port ;

node port ;

segmented expansion port .

Glossary–18

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

F fabric

Entity that interconnects node ports (N_Ports) and is capable of routing (switching) Fibre

Channel frames, using the destination ID information in the Fibre Channel frame header accompanying the frames. A switch is the smallest entity that can function as a complete switched fabric topology.

fabric element

Any active director, switch, or node in a switched fabric.

fabric login

The process by which node ports (N_Ports) establish their operating parameters. During fabric login, the presence or absence of a fabric is determined, and paths to other N_Ports are mapped. Specific operating characteristics for each port, such as buffer-to-buffer credit

(BB_Credit) and data frame size, are also established.

fabric login command

FLOGI. The command that establishes the initial operating parameters and topology for a fabric. The command is accepted by a fabric port (F_Port).

fabric mode

See

interoperability mode .

fabric port

F_Port. Physical interface within the fabric that connects to a node port (N_Port) through a point-to-point full duplex connection. See also

bridge port ;

expansion port ;

generic port

; node port ;

segmented expansion port

.

fabric services

The services that implement the various Fibre Channel protocol services that are described in the standards. These services include the fabric controller (login server), name server, and management server. fabric switches

A device which allows the communication between multiple devices using Fibre Channel protocols. A fabric switch enables the sharing bandwidth and end-nodes using basic multiplexing techniques.

failover

Automatic and nondisruptive transition of functions from an active field-replaceable unit

(FRU) that has failed to a backup FRU.

FC

See

Fibre Channel .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–19

Glossary

FC-0

The Fibre Channel layer that describes the physical link between two ports, including the transmission media, transmitter and receiver circuitry, and interfaces (D). This consists of a pair of either optical fiber or electrical cables (link media) along with transceiver circuitry which work together to convert a stream of bits at one end of the link to a stream of bits at the other end.

FC-1

Middle layer of the Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface (FC-PH) standard, defining the 8B/10B encoding/decoding and transmission protocol.

FC-2

The Fibre Channel layer that specifies the signaling protocol, rules, and mechanisms required to transfer data blocks. The FC-2 layer is very complex and provides different classes of service, packetization, sequencing, error detection, segmentation, and reassembly of transmitted data (D).

FC-3

The Fibre Channel layer that provides a set of services common across multiple node ports

(N_Ports) of a Fibre Channel node. The services are not commonly used and are essentially reserved for Fibre Channel architecture expansion (D).

FC-4

The Fibre Channel layer that provides mapping of Fibre Channel capabilities to upper level protocols (ULP), including Internet protocol (IP) and small computer system interface (SCSI)

(D).

FCA

See

Fibre Channel Association .

FC adapter

Fibre Channel adapter. See

host bus adapter .

FCC

Federal Communications Commission.

FCC-IOC

See

Fibre Channel I/O controller

.

FCFE

See

Fibre Channel fabric element

.

FCFE-MIB

See

Fibre Channel fabric element management information base

.

FCIA

See

Fibre Channel Industry Association .

Glossary–20

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

FC IP

See

Fibre Channel IP address .

FCMGMT

See

Fibre Channel management framework integration .

FC-PH

See

Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface .

feature key

A unique key to enable additional product features. This key is entered into the Configure

Feature Key dialog box in the Product Manager application to activate optional hardware and software features. Upon purchasing a new feature, Hewlett Packard will provide the feature key to the customer.

fiber

The fiber-optic cable made from thin strands of glass through which data in the form of light pulses is transmitted. It is used for high-speed transmissions over medium (200 m) to long (10 km) distances.

fiber-optic cable

Synonym for

optical cable .

fiber optics

The branch of optical technology concerned with the transmission of radiant power through fibers of transparent materials such as glass, fused silica, or plastic (E). Telecommunication applications of fiber optics use optical fibers. A single fiber or a nonspatially aligned fiber bundle is used for each information channel. Such fibers are often called optical fibers to differentiate them from fibers that are used in noncommunication applications (D).

fibre

A generic Fibre Channel term used to cover all transmission media types specified in the Fibre

Channel Physical Layer (FC-PH) standard such as optical fiber, copper twisted pair, and copper coaxial cable.

Fibre Channel

FC. Integrated set of standards recognized by American National Standards Institute (ANSI) which defines specific protocols for flexible information transfer. Logically, a point-to-point serial data channel, structured for high performance.

Fibre Channel adapter

FC adapter. See host bus adapter .

Fibre Channel address

A 3-byte node port (N_Port) identifier which is unique within the address domain of a fabric.

Each port may choose its own identifier, or the identifier may be assigned automatically during fabric login.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–21

Glossary

Fibre Channel Association

FCA. The FCA is a non-profit corporation consisting of over 150 members throughout the world. Its mission is to nurture and help develop the broadest market for Fibre Channel products through market development, education, standards monitoring, and fostering interoperability among members’ products.

Fibre Channel fabric element

FCFE. Any device linked to a fabric.

Fibre Channel fabric element management information base

FCFE-MIB. A table of variables available to network management stations and resident on a switch or director. Through the simple network management protocol (SNMP) these pointers can be manipulates to monitor, control, and configure the switch or director.

Fibre Channel Industry Association

FCIA. A corporation consisting of over 100 computer industry-related companies. Its goal is to provide marketing support, exhibits, and tradeshows for its member companies. The FCIA complements activities of the various standards committees.

Fibre Channel I/O controller

FCC-IOC. In a director, the integrated controller on the control processor (CTP) card dedicated to the task of managing the embedded Fibre Channel port. In a director or switch, the FCC-IOC controls the embedded Fibre Channel port and configures the ports’ application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).

Fibre Channel IP address

FC IP. The default FC IP on a new switch is a temporary number divided by the switch’s world-wide name (WWN). The system administrator needs to enter a valid IP address.

Fibre Channel management framework integration

FCMGMT. A standard defined by the Fibre Alliance to provide easy management for Fibre

Channel-based devices such as switches, hubs, and host-bus adapters.

Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface

FC-PH. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) document that specifies the FC-0

(physical signaling), FC-1 (data encoding), and FC-2 (frame construct) layers of the Fibre

Channel protocol (D).

Fibre Channel standard

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard that provides a common, efficient data transport system that supports multiple protocols. The architecture integrates both channel and network technologies, and provides active, intelligent interconnection among devices. All data transmission is isolated from the control protocol, allowing use of point-to-point, arbitrated loop, or switched fabric topologies to meet the needs of an application.

Glossary–22

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

Fibre Connection

FICON. An IBM set of products and services introduced in 1999 that is based on the Fibre

Channel Standard. FICON technology uses fiber-optic cables as the data transmission medium, and significantly improves I/O performance (including one Gbps bi-directional data transfer). FICON is designed to coexist with ESCON™ channels, and FICON-to-ESCON control unit connections are supported.

FICON

See

Fibre Connection .

FICON Management Server

An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch or switch through the Product

Manager application. When enabled, host control and management of the director or switch or switch is provided through an S/390 Parallel Enterprise or 2/Series Server attached to a director or switch or switch port.

field-replaceable unit

FRU. Assembly removed and replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails

(D). See

active field-replaceable unit

.

file server

A computer that stores data centrally for network users and manages access to that data.

file transfer protocol

FTP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) -based client/server protocol used to transfer files to and from a remote host. Does not perform any conversion or translation.

firewall

A networking device that blocks unauthorized access to all or parts of a network. firewall zoning

Hardware enforced access between F_Ports enforced at the source port. The hardware verifies the destination port against the zone defined for the source port. firmware

Embedded program code that resides and runs on, for example, directors, switches, and hubs.

FLASH memory

Reusable nonvolatile memory that is organized as segments for writing, and as bytes or words for reading. FLASH memory is faster than read-only memory, but slower than random access memory (D).

FLOGI

See

fabric login command .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–23

Glossary

F_Port

See

fabric port

.

frame

A variable-length packet of data that is transmitted in frame relay technology.

FRU

See

field-replaceable unit .

FTP

See

file transfer protocol

.

full-duplex

The capability to transmit in two directions simultaneously.

G gateway address

(1) In transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP), a device that connects two systems that use the same or different protocols. (2) In TCP/IP, the address of a router to which a device sends frames destined for addresses not on the same physical network (for example, not on the same Ethernet) as the sender. The hexadecimal format for the gateway address is

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX.

Gb

See

gigabit

.

GB

See

gigabyte .

Gbps

Acronym for gigabits per second.

generic port

G_Port. Physical interface on a director or switch that can function either as a fabric port

(F_Port) or an expansion port (E_Port), depending on the port type to which it connects. See also

bridge port ;

expansion port

; fabric port

; node port ;

segmented expansion port

.

GHz

See

gigahertz .

gigabit

Gb. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to approximately 134,217,728 bytes.

Approximately one eighth of a gigabyte.

Glossary–24

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary gigabyte

GB. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to 1,073,741,824 bytes. Generally approximated as one billion bytes (D).

gigahertz

GHz. One billion cycles per second (Hertz) (D).

G_Port

See

generic port .

graphical user interface

GUI. A visually oriented interface where the user interacts with representations of real-world objects displayed on the computer screen. Interactions with such objects produce actions that are intuitive to the user (D).

ground

That portion of a conducting circuit connected to the earth (D).

GSM card

A generic port (G_Port) module card containing shortwave laser ports for multimode fiber-optic cables.

GUI

See

graphical user interface .

H half duplex

The capacity to transmit in two directions, but not simultaneously.

hardware

Physical equipment (director, switch, or personal computer) as opposed to computer programs or software.

Hardware Log

Director or switch Hardware Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that provides a history of FRU removals and replacements (insertions) for an individual director or switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. See also

Audit Log ;

Event Log ;

Link Incident Log ;

Threshold Alert Log .

HBA

See

host bus adapter

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–25

Glossary

Hertz

Hz. A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.

heterogeneous fabric

A fabric containing open-fabric-compliant products from various vendors. Contrast with

homogeneous fabric

. hexadecimal

A numbering system with base of sixteen; valid numbers use the digits 0 through 9 and characters A through F, where A represents 10 and F represents 15 (D).

high availability

A performance feature characterized by hardware component redundancy and concurrent maintenance. High-availability systems maximize system uptime while providing superior reliability, availability, and serviceability.

homogeneous fabric

A fabric consisting of only one vendor’s products. Contrast with heterogeneous fabric

.

hop

(1) Data transfer from one node to another node. (2) Describes the number of switches that handle a data frame from its origination point through it’s destination point.

hop count

The number of hops a unit of information traverses in a fabric.

host bus adapter

HBA. Logic card that provides a link between the server and storage subsystem, and that integrates the operating systems and I/O protocols to ensure interoperability.

host processor

(1) A processor that controls all or part of a user application network (T). (2) In a network, the processing unit in which resides the access method for the network (D).

hot pluggable

See

concurrent maintenance .

hot spare

See

field-replaceable unit .

hot swap

See

concurrent maintenance .

hot-swapping

See

concurrent maintenance .

HTTP

See

hypertext transport protocol .

Glossary–26

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary hub

(1) In Fibre Channel protocol, a device that connects nodes into a logical loop by using a physical star topology. (2) In Ethernet, a device used to connect the HAFM server and the directors it manages.

hyperlink

A predefined link for jumping from one location to another, within the same computer or network site or even to a location at a completely different physical location. Commonly used on the world wide web for navigation, reference, and depth where published text will not suffice.

hypertext transport protocol

HTTP. A simple protocol that allows world wide web pages to be transferred quickly between web browsers and servers.

Hz

See

Hertz

.

I

ID

See

identifier

.

identifier

ID. (1) One or more characters used to identify or name a data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element (D, T). (2) A sequence of bits or characters that

identifies a program, device, or system to another program, device, or system. See also port name .

IEEE

See

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

.

IML

See

initial machine load .

inband management

Management of the director or switch through Fibre Channel. An interface connection to a port card. Contrast with

out-of-band management

. initial machine load

IML. Hardware reset for all installed control processor (CTP) cards on the director or switch.

This reset does not affect other hardware. It is initiated by pushing the IML button on a director’s or switch’s operating panel.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–27

Glossary initial program load

IPL. The process of initializing the device and causing the operating system to start. An IPL may be initiated through a menu option or a hardware button. initial program load configuration

IPL configuration. In S/390 mode, information stored in a director or switch’s nonvolatile memory that contains default configurations. The director or switch loads the file for operation when powered on.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE. An organization of engineers and technical professionals that promotes the development and application of electronic technology and allied sciences.

integrated product

Hardware product that is mounted in the Fabricenter cabinet. For example, any director or switch shipped with in the Fabricenter cabinet is an integrated product.

interface

(1) A shared boundary between two functional units, defined by functional, signal, or other characteristics. The concept includes the specification of the connection of two devices having different functions (T). (2) Hardware, software, or both, that link systems, programs, or devices (D).

Internet protocol

IP. Network layer for the transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocol used on Ethernet networks. IP provides packet routing, fragmentation, and reassembly through the data link layer (D).

Internet protocol address

IP address. Unique string of numbers (in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that identifies a device on a network. interoperability

Ability to communicate, execute programs, or transfer data between various functional units over a network.

interoperability mode

Interop mode. An operating mode set through management software that allows products to operate in homogeneous or heterogeneous fabrics.

interop mode

See

interoperability mode .

interrupt

A signal sent by a subsystem to the central processing unit (CPU) that signifies a process has either completed or could not be completed.

Glossary–28

edge switch 2/16 service manual

interswitch link

ISL. Physical expansion port (E_Port) connection between two directors in a fabric.

interswitch link hop

ISL hop. See

hop .

IOPS

Input/output operations per second.

IP

See

Internet protocol .

IP address

See

Internet protocol address .

IPL

See

initial program load .

IPL configuration

See

initial program load configuration .

ISL

See

interswitch link .

ISL hop

Interswitch link hop. See hop

.

isolated E_Port

Isolated expansion port. See

segmented expansion port .

isolated expansion port

Isolated E_Port. See

segmented expansion port

.

ITE

Information technology equipment.

Glossary

J

Java

An object-oriented programming language derived from C++ that produces code that is platform independent. Developed by Sun Microsystems designed for distribution and distributable applications development. Java applications require a program called the Java

Virtual Machine (JVM) to execute. JVMs have been developed for many of the mainstream platforms and operating systems.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–29

Glossary

Jumper cable

Optical cable that provides physical attachment between two devices or between a device and a distribution panel. Contrast with

trunk cable

. See also

optical cable .

K

Kb

See

kilobit .

KB

See

kilobyte

.

kilobit

Kb. A unit of measure for data storage, equaling 1,024 bits, or two to the tenth power. Kilobits are generally approximated as being one thousand bits.

kilobyte

KB. A unit of measure for data storage, equaling 1,024 bytes, or two to the tenth power.

Kilobytes are generally approximated as being one thousand bytes.

L laser

Laser is an acronym for light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation. A device that produces a very powerful narrow beam of coherent light of a single wavelength by simulating the emissions of photons from atoms, molecules, or ions.

latency

Amount of time elapsed between receipt of a data transmission at a switch’s incoming fabric port (F_Port) from the originating node port (N_Port) to retransmission of that data at the switch’s outgoing F_Port to the destination N_Port. The amount of time it takes for data transmission to pass through a switching device.

LCD

Liquid crystal display.

LED

See

light-emitting diode .

Glossary–30

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary light-emitting diode

LED. A semiconductor chip that emits visible or infrared light when electricity passes through it. LEDs are used on switch or director field-replaceable units (FRUs) and the front bezel to provide visual indications of hardware status or malfunctions.

LIN

See

link incident .

link

Physical connection between two devices on a switched fabric. A link consists of two conductors, one used for sending and the other for receiving, thereby providing a duplex communication path. link incident

LIN. Interruption to link due to loss of light or other causes. See also

link incident alerts .

link incident alerts

A user notification, such as a graphic symbol in the Product Manager application Hardware

View that indicates that a link incident has occurred. See also link incident

.

Link Incident Log

Director or switch Link Incident Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that provides a history of Fibre Channel link incidents (with associated port numbers) for an individual director or switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems (particularly expansion port (E_Port) segmentation problems) and repair verification. See also

Audit Log ;

Event Log ;

Hardware Log

;

Threshold Alert Log

.

LMA

See

loader/monitor area

.

load balancing

Ability to evenly distribute traffic over multiple interswitch links within a fabric. Load balancing on Hewlett Packard directors and switches takes place automatically.

loader/monitor area

LMA. Code that resides in the loader/monitor area of the control processor (CTP) card.

Among other functions, LMA code provides I/O functions available through the maintenance port, operator panel, server interface, terminal window command functions, power up diagnostics, field-replaceable unit (FRU) power-on hours update, and data read/write control, and LMA code/licensed internal code (LIC) download functions (D). local

Synonym for

channel-attached

.

logical partition

LPAR. A processor hardware subset defined to support the operation of a system control program, and can be used without affecting any of the applications in another partition (D).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–31

Glossary logical port address

In a director or switch, the address used to specify port connectivity parameters and to assign link addresses for the attached channels and control units.

logical switch number

LSN. A two-digit number used by the I/O configuration program (IOCP) to identify a director or switch (D).

logical unit number

LUN. In Fibre Channel addressing, a logical unit number is a number assigned to a storage device which, in combination with the storage device’s node port’s world-wide name, represents a unique identifier for a logical device on a storage area network. Peripherals use

LUNs to represent addresses. A small computer system interface (SCSI) device’s address can have up to eight LUNs.

login server

Entity within the Fibre Channel fabric that receives and responds to login requests. longwave

Lasers or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that emit light with wavelengths around 1300 nm.

When using single mode (9 nm) fiber, longwave lasers can be used to achieve lengths greater than 2 Km.

loopback plug

In a fiber optic environment, a type of duplex connector used to wrap the optical output signal

of a device directly to the optical input. Contrast with protective plug . Synonymous with

wrap plug

.

loopback test

Test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry, without checking the mechanism itself, by returning the output of the mechanism as input.

LPAR

See

logical partition .

LSN

See

logical switch number .

LUN

See

logical unit number

.

Glossary–32

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

M

MAC address

See

media access control address .

main panel

(1) The rightmost frame of the windows in HAFM applications. (2) The rightmost frame of the embedded web server interface window. See also

navigation panel .

maintenance analysis procedure

MAP. A written or online set of procedures that guide maintenance personnel through step-by-step instructions for hardware fault isolation, repair, and verification (D).

maintenance port

Connector on the director or switch where a PC running an American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminal emulator can be attached or dial-up connection made for specialized maintenance support.

managed product

Hardware product that can be managed with the HAFM application. Hewlett Packard directors

and switches are managed products. See also device .

management information base

MIB. Related set of software objects (variables) containing information about a managed device and accessed via simple network management protocol (SNMP) from a network management station.

management session

A session that exists when a user logs on to the HAFM application. HAFM can support multiple concurrent management sessions. The user must specify the network address of the

HAFM application’s server at logon time.

MAP

See

maintenance analysis procedure

.

matrix

See

active port address matrix .

Mb

Megabit.

MB

See

megabyte .

Mbps

Megabits per second.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–33

Glossary

MBps

Megabytes per second.

media access control address

MAC address. Hardware address of a node (device) connected to a network.

megabyte

MB. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to 1,048,576 bytes. Generally approximated as one million bytes.

memory

A device or storage system capable of storing and retrieving data. menu

A list of items displayed on a monitor from which a user can make a selection.

menu bar

The menu bar is located across the top of a monitor window. Pull-down menus are displayed by clicking on the menu bar option with the mouse, or by pressing Alt with the underlined letter of the name for the menu bar option (D).

MIB

See

management information base .

mirroring

The writing of data to pairs of drives in an array, creating two exact copies of the drive contents. This procedure provides a backup of data in case of a failure.

modem

Modem is an abbreviation for modulator/demodulator. A communication device that converts digital computer data to signals and signals to computer data. These signals can be received or transmitted by the modem via a phone line or other method of telecommunication.

ms

Millisecond. multimedia

A simultaneous presentation of data in more than one form, such as by means of both visual and audio. multimode optical fiber

A graded-index or step-index optical fiber that allows more than one mode (light path) to propagate. Contrast with

singlemode optical fiber .

multiplexer

A device that allows two or more signals to be transmitted simultaneously on a single channel.

Glossary–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary multiswitch fabric

Fibre Channel fabric created by linking more than one director or fabric switching device within a fabric.

N name server

(1) In TCP/IP, see domain name server . (2) In Fibre Channel protocol, a server that allows

node ports (N_Ports) to register information about themselves. This information allows

N_Ports to discover and learn about each other by sending queries to the name server.

name server zoning

Node port (N_Port) access management that allows N_Ports to communicate if and only if they belong to a common name server zone.

NAS

See

network-attached storage .

navigation panel

The left side of the embedded web server interface window. Click on words in this panel to display menu options. See also

main panel .

network

An arrangement of hardware, software, nodes, and connecting branches that comprises a data communication system. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) seven-layer specification partitions a computer network into independent modules from the lowest

(physical) layer to the highest (application) layer (D).

network address

Name or address that identifies a device on a transmission control protocol/Internet protocol

(TCP/IP) network. The network address can be either an IP address in dotted-decimal notation

(composed of four three-digit octets in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or a domain name (as administered on a customer network). network-attached storage

NAS. Storage connected directly to the network, through a processor and its own operating system. Lacks the processor power to run centralized, shared applications.

network interface card

NIC. An expansion board inserted into a computer so the computer can be connected to a network. Most NICs are designed for specific types of networks, protocols, and medias, although some can serve multiple networks.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–35

Glossary network management

The broad subject of managing computer networks. There exists a wide variety of software and hardware products that help network system administrators manage a network. Network management covers a wide area, including security, performance, and reliability. never principal

The setting that prevents the product from becoming the principal switch for a fabric.

NIC

See

network interface card .

nickname

Alternate name assigned to a world-wide name for a node, director or switch in the fabric. node

In Fibre Channel protocol, an end device (server or storage device) that is or can be connected to a switched fabric. See also

device .

node port

N_Port. Physical interface within an end device that can connect to an fabric port (F_Port) on a switched fabric or directly to another N_Port (in point-to-point communications). See also

bridge port

; expansion port ;

fabric port ;

generic port ;

segmented expansion port

.

node port identifier

N_Port ID. In Fibre Channel protocol, a unique address identifier by which an N_Port is uniquely known. It consists of a domain (most significant byte), an area, and a port, each 1 byte long. The N_Port ID is used in the source identifier (S_ID) and destination identifier

(D_ID) fields of a Fibre Channel frame.

nondisruptive maintenance

See

concurrent maintenance .

nonvolatile random access memory

NV-RAM. RAM that retains its content when the device power is turned off.

N_Port

See

node port .

N_Port ID

See

node port identifier .

NV-RAM

See

nonvolatile random access memory .

Glossary–36

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

O octet

An 8-bit quantity, often called a byte or word. An octet can equal a byte as long as the byte equals eight bits. See also

byte .

OEM

See

original equipment manufacturer .

offline

Referring to data stored on a medium, such as tape or even paper, that is not available immediately to the user. offline diagnostics

Diagnostics that only operate in stand alone mode. User operations cannot take place with offline diagnostics running.

offline sequence

OLS. (1) Sequence sent by the transmitting port to indicate that it is attempting to initialize a link and has detected a problem in doing so. (2) Sequence sent by the transmitting port to indicate that it is offline.

offline state

When the switch or director is in the offline state, all the installed ports are offline. The ports transmit an offline sequence (OLS) and they cannot accept a login got connection from an

attached device. Contrast with online state .

ohm

A unit of electrical resistance equal to that of a conductor in which a current of one ampere is produced by a potential of one volt across the conductor terminals (D).

OLS

See

offline sequence

.

online

Referring to data stored on the system so it is available immediately to the user.

online diagnostics

Diagnostics that can be run by the customer engineer while the operational software is running. These diagnostics do not impact user operations. online state

When the switch or director is in the online state, all of the unblocked ports are allowed to log in to the fabric and begin communicating. Devices can connect to the switch or director if the port is not blocked and can communicate with another attached device if both devices are in the same zone, or if the default zone is enabled. Contrast with

offline state .

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–37

Glossary

Open Systems Architecture

OSI. A model that represents a network as a hierarchical structure of functional layers. Each layer provides a set of functions that can be accessed and used by the layer above. Layers are independent, in that implementation of a layer can be changed without affecting other layers

(D).

open systems management server

OSMS. An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch through the Product

Manager application. When enabled, host control and management of the director or switch are provided through an Open System Interconnection (OSI) device attached to a director or switch port. open systems mode

The mode that is used for Hewlett Packard or open fabrics. See also

operating mode

;

S/390 mode

.

operating mode

In directors or switches, in managed products, a selection between s/390 and open systems mode. See also

open systems mode ;

S/390 mode .

operating system

OS. Software that controls execution of applications and provides services such as resource allocation, scheduling, I/O control, and data management. Most operating systems are predominantly software, but partial hardware implementations are possible (D, T).

Operating System/390

OS/390™. An integrated, open-enterprise server operating system developed by IBM that incorporates a leading-edge and open communications server, distributed data and file services, parallel Sysplex™ support, object-oriented programming, distributed computing environment, and open application interfaces (D).

optical cable

Single fiber, multiple fibers, or a fiber bundle in a structure built to meet optical, mechanical, and environmental specifications (D, E). See also

Jumper cable

; trunk cable

. Synonymous with

fiber-optic cable

.

optical drive backup

A data backup system that uses rewriteable optical cartridges (ROCs) as the storage medium.

optical fiber connector

Synonymous with connector .

Glossary–38

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary ordered set

In Fibre Channel protocol, four 10-bit characters (a combination of data and special characters) providing low-level link functions, such as frame demarcation and signaling between two ends of a link. It provides for initialization of the link after power-on and for some basic recovery functions. original equipment manufacturer

OEM. A company that has a special relationship with computer producers. OEMs buy components and customize them for a particular application. They sell the customized computer under their own name. OEMs may not actually be the original manufacturers. They are usually the customizers and marketers.

OS

See

operating system .

OS/390™

See

Operating System/390 .

OSI

See

Open Systems Architecture .

OSMS

See

open systems management server .

out-of-band management

Transmission of management information, using frequencies or channels other than those routinely used for information transfer.

P packet

In Fibre Channel protocol, Logical unit of information (usually in the form of a data frame) transmitted on a network. It contains a header (with all relevant addressing and timing information), the actual data, and a trailer (which contains the error checking function, usually in the form of a cyclic redundancy check), and frequently user data.

panel

A logical component of the interface window. Typically, a heading and/or frame marks the panel as an individual entity of the window. Size and shape of the panel and its data depend upon the purpose of the panel and may or may not be modified.

PC

See

personal computer

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–39

Glossary persistent binding

A form of server-level access control that uses configuration information to bind a server to a specific Fibre Channel storage volume (or logical device), using a unit number. See also

access control .

personal computer

PC. A portable computer that consists of a system unit, display, keyboard, mouse, one or more diskette drives, and internal fixed-disk storage (D).

point-to-point

A Fibre Channel protocol topology that provides a single, direct connection between two communication ports. The director or switch supports only point-to-point topology.

port

Receptacle on a device to which a cable leading to another device can be attached. Ports provide Fibre Channel connections (D). port address name

A user-defined symbolic name of 24 characters or less that identifies a particular port address.

port authorization

Feature of the password definition function that allows an administrator to extend operator-level passwords to specific port addresses for each director or switch definition managed by a personal computer (PC). Port authorization affects only operator-level actions for active and saved matrices (D).

port name

Name that the user assigns to a particular port through the Product Manager application. See

also

identifier

. Synonymous with address name .

POST

See

power-on self-test .

power-on self-test

POST. Series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically by a device when the power is turned on preferred domain ID

Configured value that a switch will request from the Principal Switch. If the preferred value is already in use, the Principal Switch will assign a different value.

preventive service planning bucket

PSP bucket. Collected problems after early ship of an IBM product.

Glossary–40

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary principal switch

In a multiswitch fabric, the switch that allocates domain IDs to itself and to all other switches in the fabric. There is always one principal switch in a fabric. If a switch is not connected to any other switches, it acts as its own principal switch.

printed wiring assembly

PWA. A thin board on which integrated circuits and other electronic components are placed and connected to each other via thin copper traces.

private device

A loop device that cannot transmit a fabric login command (FLOGI) command to a switch or director, nor communicate with fabric-attached devices. Contrast with

.public device

. processor complex

A system configuration that consists of all the machines required for operation, for example, a processor unit, a processor controller, a system display, a service support display, and a power and coolant distribution unit.

Product Manager application

Application that implements the management user interface for a director or switch. There are two Product Manager applications: director or switch Product Manager, and HAFM Product

Manager. (1) In the HAFM Services application, the software component that provides a graphical user interface for managing and monitoring HAFM products. When a product instance is opened from the HAFM application Product View or Fabric Manager Topology

View, the corresponding HAFM Product Manager application is invoked.

product name

User-configurable identifier assigned to a managed product. Typically, this name is stored on the product itself. A director or switch product name can also be accessed by a simple network management protocol (SNMP) manager as the system name.

Product View

The top-level display in the HAFM software user interface that displays icons of managed products.

prohibited port connection

In a director or switch, in S/390 operating mode, an attribute that removes dynamic connectivity capability.

proprietary

Privately owned and controlled. In the computer industry, proprietary is the opposite of open.

A proprietary design or technique is one that is owned by a company. It also implies that the company has not divulged specifications that would allow other companies to duplicate the product. Increasingly, proprietary architectures are seen as a disadvantage. Consumers prefer open and standardized architectures, which allow them to mix and match products from different manufacturers.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–41

Glossary protective plug

In a fiber-optic environment, a type of duplex connector (or cover) that provides physical protection (D). Contrast with

loopback plug .

protocol

(1) Set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in achieving communication. (2) In systems network architecture, the meanings of and sequencing rules for requests and responses for managing the network, transferring data, and synchronizing network component states. (3) A specification for the format and relative timing of data exchanged between communicating devices (D, I).

.public device

A loop device that can transmit a fabric login command (FLOGI) to a switch, receive acknowledgement from the switch’s login server, register with the switch’s name server, and communicate with fabric-attached devices. Public devices communicate with fabric-attached devices through the switch’s bridge port (B_Port) connection to a director or switch. Contrast

with

private device .

pull-down menu

See

drop-down menu

.

PWA

See

printed wiring assembly

.

R radio frequency interference

RFI. Electromagnetic radiation which is emitted by electrical circuits carrying rapidly changing signals, as a by-product of the normal operation, and which causes unwanted signals

(interference or noise) to be induced in other circuits.

RAM

See

random access memory .

random access memory

RAM. A group of computer memory locations that is numerically identified to allow high-speed access by the controlling microprocessor. A memory location is randomly accessed

by referring to its numerical identifier (D). Contrast with read-only memory . See also

dynamic random access memory ;

nonvolatile random access memory

;

static random access memory .

R_A_TOV

See

resource allocation time-out value .

Glossary–42

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary read-only memory

ROM. An information storage chip with permanent memory. Stored information cannot be changed or deleted except under special circumstances (D). Contrast with

random access memory .

redundancy

Performance characteristic of a system or product whose integral components are backed up by identical components to which operations will automatically failover in the event of a component failure. Redundancy is a vital characteristic of virtually all high-availability (24 hours/7 days per week) computer systems and networks.

remote notification

A process by which a system is able to inform remote users and workstations of certain classes of events that occur on the system. E-mail notification and the configuration of simple network management protocol (SNMP) trap recipients are two examples of remote notification programs that can be implemented on director-class switches.

remote user workstation

Workstation, such as a personal computer (PC), using HAFM application and Product

Manager application software that can access the HAFM server over a local area network

(LAN) connection. repeater

A device that generates and often amplifies signals to extend transmission distance.

rerouting delay

An option that ensures that frames are delivered in order through the fabric to their destination.

resource allocation time-out value

R_A_TOV. R_A_TOV is a value used to time-out operations that depend on the maximum possible time that a frame could be delayed in a fabric and still be delivered.

RFI

See

radio frequency interference

.

ROM

See

read-only memory

. Contrast with

random access memory .

router

An attaching device that connects two local area network (LAN) segments, which use similar or different architectures, at the reference model network layer (D). Contrast with

bridge .

RS-232

The Electronic Industry Association (EIA)-recommended specification for asynchronous serial interfaces between computers and communications equipment. It specifies both the number of pins and type of connection, but does not specify the electrical signals (D).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–43

Glossary

S

S/390 mode

The mode that is most useful when attaching to IBM S/390 Enterprise Servers. See also open systems mode ; operating mode

.

SA/MVS™

See

System Automation for Operating System/390

.

SAN

See

storage area network ;

system area network .

SA OS/390™

See

System Automation for Operating System/390

.

scalable

Refers to how well a system can adapt to increased demands. For example, a scalable network system could start with just a few nodes but easily expands to thousands of nodes. Scalability is important because it allows the user to invest in a system with confidence that a business will not outgrow it. Refers to anything whose size can be changed.

SCSI

See

small computer system interface .

segment

A fabric segments when one or more switches cannot join the fabric because of various reasons. The switch or switches remain as separate fabrics.

segmented E_Port

See

segmented expansion port .

segmented expansion port

Segmented E_Port. E_Port that has ceased to function as an E_Port within a multiswitch fabric due to an incompatibility between the fabrics that it joins. See also

bridge port ;

fabric port

;

generic port ;

node port

.

serial port

A full-duplex channel that sends and receives data at the same time. It consists of three wires: two that move data one bit at a time in opposite directions, and a third wire that is a common signal ground wire. server

A computer that provides shared resources, such as files and printers, to the network. Used primarily to store data, providing access to shared resources. Usually contains a network operating system.

Glossary–44

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

SFP transceivers

See

small form factor pluggable transceivers .

shortwave

Lasers or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that emit light with wavelengths around 780 nm or 850 nm. When using multimode fiber (50 nm) shortwave lasers can be used with Fibre Channel links less than 500 m. To achieve longer lengths, single-mode fiber is required. The preferred fiber core size is 50 micron as this fiber has large bandwidth so that the distance is limited by the fiber attenuation. A 62.5 micron core size is also supported for compatibility with existing

FDDI installations. Fiber of this type has smaller bandwidth and, in this case, the distance is limited by the fiber bandwidth.

simple mail transfer protocol

SMTP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that allows the user to create, send, and receive text messages. SMTP protocols specify how messages are passed across a link from one system to another. They do not specify how the mail application accepts, presents, or stores the mail. simple network management protocol

SNMP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)-derived protocol governing network management and monitoring of network devices.

simple network management protocol community

SNMP community. Also known as SNMP community string. SNMP community is a cluster of managed products (in SNMP terminology, hosts) to which the server or managed product running the SNMP agent belongs.

simple network management protocol community name

SNMP community name. The name assigned to a given SNMP community. Queries from an

SNMP management station to a device running an SNMP agent will only elicit a response if those queries are addressed with the correct SNMP community name. simple network management protocol management station

SNMP management station. An SNMP workstation personal computer (PC) used to oversee the SNMP network.

simple network management protocol version 1

SNMP v1. The original standard for SNMP is now referred to as SNMP v1. The Sphereon

3216 and Sphereon 3232 use SNMP v1.

simple network management protocol version 2

SNMP v2. The second version of the SNMP standard. This version expands the functionality of SNMP and broadens its ability to include OSI-based, as well as TCP/IP-based, networks as specified in RFC 1441 through 1452.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–45

Glossary singlemode optical fiber

An optical fiber that allows one wavelength-dependent mode (light path) to propagate.

Contrast with

multimode optical fiber .

small computer system interface

SCSI. An interface standard that enables computers to communicate with peripherals connected to them. Commonly used in enterprise computing and in Apple Macintosh systems.

Usually pronounced as “scuzzy.” The equivalent interface in most personal computers is enhanced integrated drive electronics (EIDE).

A narrow SCSI adapter supports up to eight devices, including itself. SCSI address 7 has the highest priority followed by 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, with 0 being the lowest priority.

small form factor pluggable transceivers

SFP transceivers. Laser-based optical transceivers for a wide range of networking applications requiring high data rates. The transceivers, which are designed for increased densities, performance, and reduced power, are well-suited for Fibre Channel applications.

SMTP

See

simple mail transfer protocol .

SNMP

See

simple network management protocol

.

SNMP community

See

simple network management protocol community .

SNMP community name

See

simple network management protocol community name .

SNMP management station

See

simple network management protocol management station .

SNMP v1

See

simple network management protocol version 1 .

SNMP v2

See

simple network management protocol version 2 .

SRAM

See

static random access memory .

SSP

See

system services processor .

state

The state of the switch or director. Possible values include online, offline, testing, and faulty.

See

offline state ; online state .

Glossary–46

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary static random access memory

SRAM. SRAM is microprocessor-cache random access memory. It is built internal to the microprocessor or on external chips. SRAM is fast, but relatively expensive (D). Contrast with

dynamic random access memory

.

storage area network

SAN. A high-performance data communications environment that interconnects computing and storage resources so that the resources can be effectively shared and consolidated. stored addresses

In S/390 mode, a method for configuring addresses.

subnet

A portion of a network that shares a common address component. On transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) networks, subnets are defined as all devices whose IP addresses have the same prefix. Dividing a network into subnets is useful for both security and performance reasons. IP networks are divided using a subnet mask. subnet mask

A mask used by a computer to determine whether another computer with which it needs to communicate is located on a local or remote network. The network mask depends upon the class of networks to which the computer is connecting. The mask indicates which digits to look at in a longer network address and allows the router to avoid handling the entire address.

Subnet masking allows routers to move the packets more quickly. Typically, a subnet may represent all the machines at one geographic location, in one building, or on the same local area network.

switch

A device that connects, filters and forwards packets between local area network (LAN) segments or storage area network (SAN) nodes or devices.

switchover

Changing a backup field-replaceable unit (FRU) to the active state, and the active FRU to the backup state. switch priority

Value configured into each switch in a fabric that determines its relative likelihood of becoming the fabric’s principal switch. Lower values indicate higher likelihood of becoming the principal switch. A value of 1 indicates the highest priority; 225 is the lowest priority. A value of 225 indicates that the switch is not capable of acting as the principal switch. The value

0 is illegal.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–47

Glossary

System Automation for Operating System/390

SA OS/390™. IBM licensed software that provides System/390 Parallel Sysplex™ management, automation capabilities, and integrated systems and network management. SA

OS/390 manages host, remote processor, and I/O operations. SA OS/390 integrates the functions of Automated Operations Control for Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS™), ESCON™

Manager, and Target System Control Facility (D).

system name

See

product name

.

system services processor

SSP. In a director or switch, the central controlling processor. Controls the RS-232 maintenance port and the Ethernet port of a Fibre Channel director or switch.

T

TB

See

terabyte

.

TCP

See

transmission control protocol .

TCP/IP

See

transmission control protocol/Internet protocol

.

technical support

Single point of contact for a customer when assistance is needed in managing or troubleshooting a product. Technical support provides assistance twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week, including holidays. The technical support number is (800) 652 6672.

Synonymous with customer support

.

Telecommunications Industry Association

TIA. A member organization of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), TIA is the trade group representing the communications and information technology industries. See also

Electronic Industries Association .

telnet

The Internet standard protocol for remote terminal connection over a network connection.

Glossary–48

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary terabyte

TB. One thousand (1,000) gigabytes; one terabyte of text on paper would consume 42,500 trees. At 12 characters per inch, 1 TB of data in a straight line would encircle the earth 56 times and stretch some 1.4 million miles equalling nearly three round trips from the earth to the moon.

Threshold Alert Log

Director or switch Threshold Alert Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that provides details of threshold alert notifications for an individual director or switch. The log displays the date and time an alert occurred, and displays details about the alert as configured for the product. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. See also

Audit Log ;

Event Log ;

Hardware Log ;

Link

Incident Log

.

TIA

See

Telecommunications Industry Association

.

topology

Logical and/or physical arrangement of stations on a network.

transceiver modules

Transceiver modules come in longwave, extra longwave, or shortwave laser versions, providing a single fiber connection. transfer rate

The speed with which data can be transmitted from one device to another. Data rates are often measures in megabits (Mbps) or megabytes (MBps) per second, or gigabits (Gbps) or gigabytes per second (GBps). transmission control protocol

TCP. The transport layer for the transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocol widely used on Ethernet networks and any network that conforms to U.S. Department of Defense standards for network protocol. TCP provides reliable communication and control through full-duplex connections (D).

transmission control protocol/Internet protocol

TCP/IP. A layered set of protocols (network and transport) that allows sharing of applications among devices on a high-speed local area network (LAN) communication environment (D).

See also

transmission control protocol ;

Internet protocol .

trap

Unsolicited notification of an event originating from a simple network management protocol

(SNMP) managed device and directed to an SNMP network management station.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–49

Glossary trap host

Simple network management protocol (SNMP) management workstation that is configured to receive traps.

trap recipient

In simple network management protocol (SNMP), a network management station that receives messages through SNMP for specific events that occur on the arbitrated loop device. trunk cable

Cable consisting of multiple fiber pairs that do not directly attach to an active device. This cable usually exists between distribution panels and can be located within, or external to, a building (D). Contrast with

Jumper cable . See also

optical cable .

U

UDP

See

user datagram protocol .

UL

See

Underwriters Laboratories

.

ULP

See

upper level protocol .

unblocked connection

In a director or switch, the absence of the blocked attribute for a specific port. Contrast with

blocked connection . See

connectivity attribute

. See also allowed connection ;

dynamic connection

;

dynamic connectivity .

unblocked port

Devices communicating with an unblocked port can login to the director or switch and communicate with devices attached to any other unblocked port (assuming that this is supported by the current zoning configuration).

Underwriters Laboratories

UL. A laboratory organization accredited by the Occupational Safety and Health

Administration and authorized to certify products for use in the home and workplace (D).

unicast

Communication between a single sender and a single receiver over a network.

uninterruptable power supply

UPS. A buffer between public utility power or another power source, and a system that requires precise, uninterrupted power (D).

Glossary–50

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary

UNIX

A popular multi-user, multitasking operating system originally designed to be a small, flexible system used exclusively by programmers. UNIX was one of the first operating systems to be written in a high-level programming language, namely C. This meant that it could be installed on virtually any computer for which a C compiler existed. Due to its portability, flexibility, and power, UNIX has become the leading operating system for workstations. Historically, it has been less popular in the personal computer market, but the emergence of a new version called

Linux is revitalizing UNIX across all platforms. upper level protocol

ULP. Protocols that map to and run on top of the Fibre Channel FC-4 layer. ULPs include

Internet protocol (IP) and small computer system interface (SCSI).

UPS

See

uninterruptable power supply

.

user datagram protocol

UDP. A connectionless protocol that runs on top of Internet protocol (IP) networks. User datagram protocol/Internet protocol (UDP/IP) offers very few error recovery services, instead providing a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network. UDP/IP is primarily used for broadcasting messages over an entire network. Contrast with

transmission control protocol/Internet protocol .

V

VAC

See

volts alternating current .

VDC

See

volts direct current .

virtual machine

VM®. (1) A virtual data processing system that appears to be at the exclusive disposal of a single user, but whose functions are accomplished by sharing the resources of a real data processing system. (2) A functional simulation of a computer system and its associated devices, multiples of which can be controlled concurrently by one operating system (D, T).

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–51

Glossary virtual storage

VS. (1) Storage space that may be regarded as addressable main storage by the user of a computer system in which virtual addresses are mapped to real addresses. The size of virtual storage is limited by the addressing scheme of the computer system and by the amount of auxiliary storage available, not by the number of main storage locations. (2) Addressable space that is apparent to the user as processor storage space, from which the instructions and the data are mapped to the processor storage locations (A, D, I).

volt

A measure of the difference in electrical potential between two points in a conductor, equal to one ohm resistance carrying a constant current of one ampere, with a power dissipation of one

watt (D). See volts alternating current

;

volts direct current

.

volts alternating current

VAC. A term for classifying the system in which volts exist. VAC means that the volts exist in a circuit where the electricity can travel in either direction. Contrast with

volts direct current

.

See

volt .

volts direct current

VDC. A term for classifying the system in which volts exist. VDC means that the electricity has a specific path it must follow. Contrast with

volts alternating current . See volt

.

W warning message

A message that indicates a possible error has been detected. See also error message .

watt

A unit of power in the International System equal to one joule (Newton-meter) per second (D).

window

The main window for the HAFM application or Product Manager applications. Each application has a unique window that is divided into separate panels for the title, navigation control, alerts, and the main or Product View. The user performs all management and monitoring functions for these Fibre Channel products through the application window.

workstation

A terminal or microcomputer usually connected to a network or mainframe at which a user can perform applications. world-wide names

WWN. Eight-byte string that uniquely identifies a Fibre Channel entity (that is, a port, a node, a switch, a fabric), even on global networks.

Glossary–52

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary wrap plug

Synonym for

loopback plug .

wrap test

A test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry, without checking the mechanism itself, by returning the output of the mechanism as input. A wrap test can transmit a specific character pattern through a system and compare the pattern received with the pattern transmitted (D).

write authorization

Permission for an simple network management protocol (SNMP) management station with the proper community name to modify writable management information base (MIB) variables.

WWN

See

world-wide names

.

Z zip drive

A high capacity floppy disk and disk drive developed by the Iomega Corporation. Zip disks are slightly larger than conventional floppy disks. The storage capacity for zip disks is between 100 and 250 MB of data. The zip drive and disk is used for backing up the HAFM server, and is located on the communications tray behind the HAFM server.

zone

Set of devices that can access one another. All connected devices may be configured into one or more zones. Devices in the same zone can see each other. Those devices that occupy different zones cannot. See also

active zone set ;

zone set

;

zoning .

zone member

Specification of a device to be included in a zone. A zone member can be identified by the port number of the director or switch to which it is attached or by its port world-wide name

(WWN). In multiswitch fabrics, identification of end-devices or nodes by WWN is preferable.

zone set

A collection of zones that may be activated as a unit. See also active zone set ;

zone .

zoning

Grouping of several devices by function or by location. All devices connected to a connectivity product, such as the director or switch, may be configured into one or more zones. See also

access control ;

zone

.

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Glossary–53

Glossary

Glossary–54

edge switch 2/16 service manual

10/100 Mbps LAN connectors

1–12

A

additional port function

2–67

alert symbols

HAFM

1–22

Product Manager

1–26

alerts introduction

1–5

audit logs

3–6

B

bandwidth of ports

1–1

beaconing introduction

1–6

blocking a port

3–39

C

call home feature introduction

1–6

call-home notification reporting

1–42

CD-ROM drive

1–12

channel wrap test, procedure

3–29

circle, green meaning of

1–35

clock speed

1–12

configuration data backing up

3–48

managing

3–48

resetting

3–50

restoring

3–49

connectors and indicators

1–19

edge switch 2/16 service manual

CTP2 card event code tables B–21

D

data collection

1–6

diagnostic software introduction

1–6

diagnostics

HAFM

1–21

port

3–19

Product Manager

1–24

software

1–20

dialog boxes port properties

1–29

switch properties

1–28

diamond, red meaning of

1–35

director firmware version

1–13

disk drive

1–12

domain ID

1–8

zone member

3–18

E

E_Port segmentation

1–8

Edge Switch 2/32 operating status

1–35

electrostatic discharge (ESD) repair procedures, caution

3–2

email messages introduction

1–6

e-mail notification reporting

1–42

Index

Index–1

Index embedded web server

1–12

diagnostics

1–40

ESD repair procedures, caution

3–2

Ethernet hub

1–12

LAN, connector

1–19

ethernet LAN connectors

1–12

event codes

CTP2 card events B–21 description

B–1

fan module events B–15 power supply events B–11 system events B–3 thermal events B–36 event log

3–6

external loopback tests

3–28

F

fabric logs

3–5

fabric manager messages

A–1

fabric tree

1–36

Fabrics Tab zone sets view

3–17

fabrics view topology tab, illustration

1–36

view area

1–36

zone sets tab, illustration

1–37

fan module events, event codes tables B–15 fans

1–18

illustrations

5–2

LEDs

1–20

part numbers

5–2

removal

4–6

replacement

4–7

fiber-optic cleaning kit

1–44

components, cleaning

3–33

protective plug

1–43

wrap plug

1–43

Fibre Connection management server, see FMS

Index–2

Fibre Connection, see FICON

FICON product management

1–4

field replaceable units

See FRUs

firmware adding a version

3–41

deleting a version

3–45

determining version

3–40

downloading

3–45

managing versions

3–40

modifying description

3–44

FMS product management

1–4

FRU list view

1–31

displayed

1–31

FRUs 1–17 fans

1–18 ,

5–2

front-accessible

5–1

illustrations

5–1

part numbers

5–1

power supplies

1–18 ,

5–2

rear-accessible

5–2

RRPs

4–1

SFP transceivers 1–18 ,

5–1

status LEDs

1–20

G

gateway address default

2–1 ,

3–2

H

HAFM alert symbols

1–22

audit log

3–3

diagnostic features

1–21

event log

3–3

HAFM application introduction

1–3

messages

A–1

HAFM Server description

1–11

specifications

1–12

edge switch 2/16 service manual

HAFM server remote workstation

1–3

HAFM Services description

1–38

event table

1–38

status line

1–39

hard drive

1–12

hardware log

3–7

Hardware View

1–24 ,

3–20

hardware view

1–27

displayed

1–27 ,

1–28

status conditions

1–27

status symbol function

1–28

using

1–27

I

illustrated parts breakdown

5–1

IML button 1–17

, 1–19

IML procedure

3–35

inactive port

2–67

inband management access methods

1–4

Intel Pentium processor

1–12

internal loopback tests

3–26

IP address default

2–1 ,

3–2

IPL procedure

3–35

L

LAN connector

1–19

LEDs fan

1–20

FRU status

1–20

port

3–19

port SFPs

1–20

power supply

1–20

PWR LED

1–20

link incident log

3–9 ,

3–10

local area network

See LAN

logs audit

3–6

event

3–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Index fabric

3–5

HAFM Audit

3–3

HAFM Event

3–3

hardware

3–7

introduction

1–5

link incident

3–9 ,

3–10

product status

3–5

session

3–4

using information

3–3

loopback tests port, external

3–28

port, internal

3–26

M

maintenance approach

1–13

event codes

B–1

maintenance analysis procedures

See MAPs

maintenance port

1–6

,

1–20

management

HAFM application

1–3

out-of-band

1–3

SNMP agent

1–3

switch

1–3

web server

1–3

MAP 0000-Start Map

2–7

MAP 0100-Power Distribution Analysis

2–26

MAP 0200-POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis

2–32

MAP 0300-Console Application Problem

Determination

2–33

MAP 0400-Loss of Console Communication

2–39

MAP 0500-Fan and CTP Card Failure Analysis

2–58

MAP 0600-Port Failure and Link Incident

Analysis

2–63

MAP 0700-Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port

Problem Determination

2–79

MAP 0800-Console PC Problem Determination

2–90

Index–3

Index

MAPs

2–1

collecting data

3–31

event codes

B–1

MAP 0000-Start Map

2–7

MAP 0100-Power Distribution Analysis

2–26

MAP 0200-POST, Reset or IPL Failure

Analysis

2–32

MAP 0300-Console Application Problem

Determination

2–33

MAP 0400-Loss of Console Communication

2–39

MAP 0500-Fan and CTP Card Failure

Analysis

2–58

MAP 0600-Port Failure and Link Incident

Analysis

2–63

MAP 0700-Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port

Problem Determination

2–79

MAP 0800-Console PC Problem

Determination

2–90

quick start

2–1

memory

HAFM server

1–12

RAM

1–12

menu bar, description

1–23

menus menu bar

1–23

node list view

1–32

performance view

1–34

port

1–29

port list view

1–30

switch

1–28

messages fabric manager

A–1

HAFM application

A–1

Product Manager

A–18

modem (external)

1–12

modem cable

1–43

multiswitch fabric

1–8

domain ID

1–8

E_Port segmentation

1–8

port segmentation

1–8

zoning

1–8

N

Node List View

3–16

node list view

1–31

node list view menu

1–32

nodes, types, list of

3–17

notebook PC

1–11

null modem cable

1–43

O

offline, setting switch

3–37

online, setting switch

3–37

open-system management server, see OSMS

operating status for the Edge Switch 2/32

1–35

OSMS product management

1–4

out-of-band management description

1–3

P

part numbers

5–1

parts

5–1

password default

2–1 ,

3–2

PCMCIA slots

1–12

Pentium processor

1–12

Performance View

3–17

performance view menu

1–34

performance view option

1–33

personal computer, HAFM server

1–11

port blocking

3–39

diagnostics

3–19

LEDs

3–19

loopback tests, external

3–28

loopback tests, internal

3–26

segmentation

1–8

swapping

3–30

unblocking

3–39

port bandwidth

1–1

Port List View

3–12

port list view

Index–4

edge switch 2/16 service manual

displayed

1–30

port list view menu

1–30

port menu

1–29

port properties dialog box

1–29

ports displaying statistics

1–34

WWN, node list view

2–73

ports list view

1–29

power off procedure

3–35

power supplies

1–18

illustrations

5–2

LEDs

1–20

part numbers

5–2

removal

4–4

replacement

4–5

power supply events, event codes tables B–11 preventive maintenance, cleaning fiber-optic components

3–33

product management

FICON

1–4

FMS

1–4

inband access

1–4

OSMS

1–4

Product Manager alert symbols

1–26

diagnostic features

1–24

Hardware View

1–24 ,

3–20

messages

A–18

Node List View

3–16

Performance View

3–17 ,

3–24

Port List View

3–12

using views

3–12

product manager

1–27

FRU list view

1–31

menu bar

1–23

node list view

1–31

node list view menu

1–32

performance view

1–33

performance view menu

1–34

port list view

1–29

port menu

1–29

status bar

1–34

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Index switch view

1–28

view panel

1–27

product status log

3–5

protective plug, fiber-optic

1–43

Q

quick start, MAPs

2–1

R

RAM

1–12

remote workstation configurations

1–14

minimum specifications

1–16

repair, event codes

B–1

RRPs

4–1

fans

4–6

power supplies

4–4

SFP transceivers

4–2

S

S/390 mode channel wrap tests

3–19

procedure

3–29

enabling or disabling port channel wrapping

3–14

port channel wrapping, enabling and disabling

3–25

swapping fibre channel port address

3–25

swapping port addresses

3–14

swapping ports

3–30

safety

ESD repair procedures

3–2

serviceability features

1–5

session log

3–4

SFP transceivers 1–18 illustrations

5–1

LEDs

1–20

longwave 1–18 part numbers

5–1

protective plug

1–43

removal

4–2

replacement

4–3

Index–5

Index shortwave 1–18 wrap plug

1–43

simple network management protocol

See SNMP

SNMP introduction

1–3

,

1–7

trap message support

1–41

software diagnostic features

1–20

installing

3–51

upgrading

3–51

specifications, remote workstations

1–16

specifications, switch

1–9

square, gray, meaning of

1–35

statistics on ports

1–34

status bar

1–34

,

1–35

status bar symbols

1–35

status table

1–25

subnet mask default

2–1 ,

3–2

swapping ports

3–30

switch audit logs

3–6

connectors and indicators

1–19

description

1–2

error-detection, reporting, and serviceability features

1–5

event codes

B–1

event log

3–6

fabric logs

3–5

fans

1–18

FRUs 1–17

FRUs, front accessible

5–1

FRUs, rear accessible

5–2

hardware log

3–7

illustrated parts breakdown

5–1

IML procedure

3–35

IPL procedure

3–35

LEDs

1–20

link incident log

3–9 ,

3–10

maintenance port

1–20

management

1–3

MAPs

2–1

multiswitch fabric

1–8

power off procedure

3–35

power supplies

1–18

setting offline

3–37

setting online

3–37

SFP transceivers 1–18 specifications

1–9

status table

1–25

tools supplied

1–43

zoning feature

1–7

switch menu

1–28

switch properties dialog box

1–28

symbols, status bar, table of

1–35

system events event codes tables B–3

T

thermal events, event codes tables B–36 tools and test equipment

1–42

tools, supplied by service personnel

1–44

tools, supplied with switch

1–43

topology tab

1–36

illustration

1–36

transmission distance

1–1

triangle, yellow meaning of

1–35

U

unblocking a port

3–39

V

versions director firmware

1–13

Intel processor

1–12

Windows 2000

1–12

view area

1–36

view panel

1–27

views

Hardware

1–24 ,

3–20

Node List

3–16

Performance

3–17

, 3–24

Port List

3–12

Index–6

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Zone sets

3–17

W

web server introduction

1–3

web server, embedded

1–12

Windows 2000

1–12

wrap plug, fiber-optic

1–43

WWN node list view

2–73

WWN, zone member

3–18

Z

Zip drive

1–12

zone set description of

1–7

zone set tab

1–37

zone sets tab, illustration

1–37

Zone sets View

3–17

zoning

1–7

Index

edge switch 2/16 service manual

Index–7